Request Rejected
Anatel — Agência Nacional de Telecomunicações
Homelink
Licence - OpenStreetMap Foundation
Mercedes-Benz Betriebsstoff-Vorschriften
REACHREACH
Index of /extra
Owner's Manual for Mercedes-Benz models including: EQB 2021 SUV
1±Increases recuperation →165 qReduces recuperation → 165 2Combination switch → 140 3Instrumentdisplay → 246 4DIRECT SELECT lever → 169
File Info : application/pdf, 457 Pages, 8.89MB
DocumentDocumentDDiissccllaaiimmeerr ADlalslafonlggueangde vPeDrFs-iDonoskuomf ethnet ffüorlldoiwesinesg FPaDhFrzdeoucgummodeenltl fboerztiehhist sviechhicinleamlleondel TrSehpleraatfceohlsvloelwresilinoygnteovnevrnesuhiroicnalueofsfditniheteeFnaOdhwrezndeeufrog`sre,sMdaailenufoüanrl tddheeenscGdreiburmtessacnhaelmlnmaMrokaderektltsab,nesdsetwriimehsimcahtnd scsiponerdrceuisanpldeodqniuedidptoemnGedenertumotsafcnyhoreeungrVuvolearhsticcohlnreis.f.tCeonuennttrsyp-rsepcehcenif.icBiltatnegwueangdeevnaSriieatsiiocnhsaanre pIhoresnsiabuleto. rPislieeartseennMoeterctehdaets-yBoeunrzvSeehrivcicleesmtüitgzhptunnkott, bume eeqinugipepderudckwteitshEaxlelmthpelar dPfüelresacnsredibeceroednFftauahncrctzteyiuognumsr .aoTduhetihlsleoarulisnoeddaFfaMfheerczrtecsuegdsmaefsoe-dtByee-llnrjaezhleSrevearznvuitceseryhCsatelteenmntr.seatnodofbutnacintions. PalperaisnetecdonvetarscitoynofuorraoutthheorrviseehdicMleemrcoeddeelss-Banednzvdeheiaclleersmhoipdeiflyyoeuarws.oTuhldisliPkDeF tdDooiecrseuecmsePeivDneFt-aiDspotkrhiunemtleeadntetOstwevnlleterdrs`iiseoMank.atPunoeulsalesliVbfoelerrsoviotanhreidaratvri.oeMnhsöicgtloleicyhmoeouAdrbevwlesehiacicnhludenvmgeeahnyizcnuleot mbIheroetdmaeklkeyonenaiknrrtesot.eancFcaohurnzetuagskMönenrcteendneisc-hBtebnezrüccoknssicthatnigttlyseuipnd, daateMs etrhceeidrevse-hBiecnlzes to tsheeinsetaFatehrozfetuhgeeasrttänandidgidnetrmodnuecueesstcehnaSntgaensdindedreTseigcnhnainkdanepqausipstm, seonwt.iePlease TtÄhhnedereeorfunonlrigeneennoOintweFntoherarm`tstuMhnidasnAPuuDasFlstidsaotttchuuenmgcevunorrtrneiinmtnmaotn.wdBavityaterliedbpevlaeccrhestsieontnhS.eIietpirdsianphteords,sdviabesrlesiothnat dwdieehvsicieahstiPwoDnaFs-DadfeofkleiuvcmetirenengdtywinoiukthreisnypeoemucriFfvaiecllhvdiecahlseigc. eledrcuocukltde Enxoetmbpelatrakeersnetinztt,odaasccmoiut nt adsemMFearcherzdeeusg-Bauesngzeclioefnesrttawnutlrydea.dapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner`s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner`s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only
Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz
Before you rst drive o , read this operator's manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this operator's manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.
The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:
R Model
R Order
R National version
R Availability
Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The illustrations in this operator's manual show a le -hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of car parts and control elements di ers accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features
The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital operator's manual R Printed operator's manual R Service booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements R Supplementary documents
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.
2435846302Z102
2435846302Z102
2 Contents
Symbols .......................................................... 5
At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 10 Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) ........................................................ 12 Overhead control panel ................................. 14 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 18
Digital Owner's Manual ................................. 20 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 20
General notes ............................................... 22 Protection of the environment ....................... 22 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... 22 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ 22 Owner's Manual ............................................ 24 Mercedes me App ......................................... 24 Operating safety ............................................ 25 Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in di erent countries .......................... 27
Diagnostics connection ................................. 35 Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ 36 Vehicle registration ....................................... 37 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 37 Information on the REACH regulation ............. 37 Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. 37 Implied warranty ........................................... 38 QR code for rescue card ............................... 38 Data storage ................................................. 38 Copyright ...................................................... 42
Occupant safety ............................................ 43 Restraint system ........................................... 43 Seat belts ..................................................... 45 Airbags ......................................................... 49 PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ 56 Automatic measures a er an accident ........... 57 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 57 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 78
Opening and closing ...................................... 79 Key ............................................................... 79 Doors ............................................................ 82
Load compartment ........................................ 87 Side windows ................................................ 92 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 95 Anti-the protection ...................................... 99
Seats and stowing ....................................... 102 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 102 Notes on the height limit on the third row of seats ....................................................... 103 Seats .......................................................... 103 Steering wheel ............................................ 114 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 115 Memory function ......................................... 116 Stowage areas ............................................ 118 Sockets ....................................................... 132 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ........ 135 Fitting/removing the oor mats ................... 137
Light and sight ............................................ 139 Exterior lighting ........................................... 139 Interior lighting ............................................ 142 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ 144
Contents 3
Mirrors ........................................................ 148
Climate control ........................................... 151 Overview of climate control systems ............ 151 Operating the climate control system .......... 152
Driving and parking ..................................... 157 Driving ........................................................ 157 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 167 Transmission ............................................... 169 Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 171 Charging the high-voltage battery ................ 171 Parking ....................................................... 190 Driving and driving safety systems ............... 196 Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 244
Instrument display and on-board computer ........................................................... 246 Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer .......................................... 246 Overview of instrument display .................... 247 Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... 248 Operating the on-board computer ................ 248
Overview of displays on the instrument display ........................................................ 249 Head-up display .......................................... 250
MBUX multimedia system ............................ 252 Overview and operation ............................... 252 System settings .......................................... 261 Drive system settings .................................. 265 Navigation ................................................... 266 Telephone ................................................... 274 Mercedes me app ....................................... 278 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 287 Radio & media ............................................. 294 Sound settings ............................................ 299
Maintenance and care ................................. 300 ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 300 Engine compartment ................................... 301 Cleaning and care ....................................... 305
Breakdown assistance ................................. 313 Emergency .................................................. 313 Flat tyre ...................................................... 315
Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 322 Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 324 Electrical fuses ............................................ 329
Wheels and tyres ......................................... 333 Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics ................................................... 333 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ........................................................... 333 Notes on snow chains ................................. 333 Tyre pressure .............................................. 334 Wheel change ............................................. 337 Emergency spare wheel ............................... 346
Technical data ............................................. 348 Notes on technical data .............................. 348 On-board electronics ................................... 348 Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... 350 Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. 350 Operating uids ........................................... 352 Vehicle data ................................................ 355
4 Contents
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps .......................................................... 358 Display messages ........................................ 358 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 407
Index .......................................................... 419
In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following symbols:
& WARNING Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
#
Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic
Display Display eld in the Instrument Display/media display
4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system
5
Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Indicates a cause
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.
Symbols 5
6 At a glance Cockpit Le -hand-drive vehicles
1 ± Increases recuperation
q Reduces recuperation 2 Combination switch 3 Instrument display 4 DIRECT SELECT lever 5 Start/stop button 6 Media display 7 Climate control systems 8 £ Hazard warning light system 9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps A Glove compartment B Stowage compartment C Cup holder D 8 Controller for volume and switching
sound on/o Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o
At a glance Cockpit 7
165 E z Calls up navigation
254
165 F | Calls up radio or media
254
140 G % Calls up the telephone
254
246 H ß Calls up favourites
254
169 I y Calls up vehicle functions
254
160 J c Active Parking Assist
241
252 K DYNAMIC SELECT switch
168
152 L Touchpad
254
141 M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
248
53 N Adjusts the steering wheel manually
114
120 O ý Switches the steering wheel heater
120
on/o
115
P Control panel:
252
252
On-board computer Cruise control or variable limiter I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
248
205
209
Q Diagnostics connection
35
8 At a glance Cockpit
R Opens the bonnet S ! Electric parking brake T Light switch
302
193
139
10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) Instrument display (standard)
1 Ú System error 2 ! ABS 3 #! Turn signal light 4 h Tyre pressure monitoring system 5 # Electrical fault 6 _ Reduced power 7 L Distance warning 8 J Brakes (yellow) 9 J Brakes (red) A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) B ! Electric parking brake (red) C ï Indicator lamp inoperative
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11
410 D ü Seat belt
415 E R Rear fog light
140 F K High beam
417
L Low beam
410
T Standing lights
410 G å ESP® OFF
414
÷ ESP®
412 H 6 Restraint system
412 I Charge level display
412 J R Range
412 K õ Operational readiness of drive system
L Ù Power steering
409
140
140
139
139
415
415
409
247
247
160
411
12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) Widescreen cockpit instrument display
1 #! Turn signal lights 2 å ESP® OFF
÷ ESP® 3 R Rear fog light 4 K High beam
L Low beam T Standing lights 5 Ú System error 6 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 7 õ Operational readiness of drive system 8 J Brakes (yellow) 9 # Electrical fault
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) 13
140 A L Distance warning
415 B Ù Power steering
415 C ! ABS
140 D h Tyre pressure monitoring system
140 E 6 Restraint system
139 F Charge level display
139 G R Range
410 H _ Reduced power
412 I ! Electric parking brake (red)
160 J ü Seat belt
412 K J Brakes (red)
410 L ï Indicator lamp inoperative
414
411
415
417
409
247
247
410
412
409
412
14 At a glance Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors
2 p Switches the le -hand reading lamp
on/o
3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con-
trol on/o
4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o
5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o
6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/o
At a glance Overhead control panel 15
7 ; me button
278
142 8 G SOS button
278
9 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun-
95
142
roof
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 142 A Inside rearview mirror 142
95
149
142
16 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment
1 V Operates the memory function
2 Adjusts the seats electrically
3 w Switches the seat heating on/o
4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o
5 W Opens/closes the rear le side window
6 W Opens/closes the le side window
7 Í Operates the outside mirrors
8 q Opens/closes the tailgate
9 W Opens/closes the right side window
A W Opens/closes the rear right side window
B S Child safety lock for the rear side win-
dows
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 17
117 C Opens the door 106 D ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle 113 E Adjusts the head restraints 113 F Con gures the seat settings
92 G Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 92 H Adjusts the seat height 148 I Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 87 J Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position 92 K Adjusts the seat cushion length 92 78
83
83
110
112
105
105
105
105
105
18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19
1 B-pillar with:
8 Towing away
QR code for accessing the rescue card
38 9 Flat tyre
2 Safety vests
313 A Socket ap with:
3 Fire extinguisher
315
information label on tyre pressure
4 ; me button
278
QR code for accessing the rescue card
G SOS button
278 B Towing away
5 £ Hazard warning light system
141 C TIREFIT kit
6 To check and top up operating uids
352 D Warning triangle
7 To operate the high-voltage disconnect device
157 E First-aid kit (so sided)
324
315
335
38
324
317
313
314
20 Digital Owner's Manual
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Owner's Manual
R Tips: nd information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display.
R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks.
R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.
4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:
Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system.
# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
R Search: search for keywords in order to nd quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
R Quick start: here is where you nd the rst steps towards setting up your vehicle.
1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture
Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster
LINGUATRONIC: call up via the voice control system
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.
Digital Owner's Manual 21
22 General notes
Protection of the environment
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
# Monitor the energy consumption.
# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking. # Drive in a style which saves energy.
Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment. # Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries
at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-ofLife Vehicles Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.
For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components
MercedesBenz AG o ers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.
# Recycled reconditioned components and parts from MercedesBenz AG.
* NOTE Impairment of the operating e ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Centre console R Lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
General notes 23
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Have accessory parts retro tted at a quali ed specialist workshop.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been o cially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.
Certain parts are only o cially approved for installation or modi cation if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
This is the case in the following situations:
R The vehicle type is di erent from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted.
R Other road users could be endangered.
R The noise level gets worse.
Always specify the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) (/ page 350) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts.
24 General notes
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle:
R The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press.
R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries.
R The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date.
Note that your vehicle may not be tted with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may di er from that in the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery.
Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a MercedesBenz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Mercedes me App Notes about the on-demand feature
You can also activate various functions (ondemand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me a er purchasing your vehicle. Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me
Requirements: R The vehicle has GPS reception. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
account.
Ordering and activating on-demand feature
# Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store.
# Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.
Speeding up activation
# Switch the vehicle o and lock it.
# A er about 2 minutes, unlock the vehicle and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a noti cation also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions or system failure
In order to avoid malfunctions or system failures:
# Always have the speci ed service/maintenance work as well as any necessary repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modi cations to electronic components
Modi cations to electronic components, their so ware or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.
# You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their so ware.
# Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody and suspension components
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components
General notes 25
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres and high-voltage battery components may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
or
# If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and tra c conditions, and contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Electric vehicles have an electric motor. The electric motor's energy supply is provided by the highvoltage on-board electrical system.
26 General notes
& DANGER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged components may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the highvoltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.
# Never make any modi cations to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or damaged.
# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.
The components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange.
Vehicles with an electric motor generate signi cantly less vehicle noise emissions than vehicles with combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users in certain situations. This can occur, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle cannot be seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably.
Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in di erent countries
Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certi ed according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN-R 10.
the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html
vehicle installed radio components
Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognise the EU manufacturer's declaration of conformity:
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
General notes 27
For the United Kingdom only:
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle: The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the Radio Regulations 2017 directive. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html
28 General notes
These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.
For Jamaica only: All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.
For Nigeria only:
For Russia only:
For Brazil only: Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission
The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Ukraine only:
General notes 29
The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way
radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Wireless applications in the vehicle Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.
Wireless applications in the vehicle Technology Remote Keyless Entry Wireless Power Transmission Remote Keyless Entry Wireless Power Transmission
Frequency range 20 kHz (990 kHz) 105 kHz (90119 kHz) 120 kHz (119135 kHz) 127 kHz (119135 kHz)
Near- eld communication
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener
13.55313.567 MHz 433 MHz (433.05434.79 MHz)
868 MHz (868.0868.6 MHz)
Transmission output/magnetic eld strength 72 dBA/m at 10m 42 dBA/m at 10m 42 dBA/m at 10m 66 dBA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz 42 dBA/m at 10m 10 mW ERP
25 mW ERP
30 General notes
Technology Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones RLAN Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN Remote Keyless Entry
76 GHz radar Carsharing Module
Frequency range 869 MHz (868.7869.2 MHz)
2.4 GHz ISM band (24002483.5 MHz) 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (51505250 MHz) 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (57255875 MHz) 7.25 GHz UWB (6.08.5 GHz)
7677 GHz NFC: 13.55313.567 MHz Bluetooth®: 24022480 MHz
Transmission output/magnetic eld strength 25 mW ERP
100 mW EIRP 25 mW EIRP 25 mW EIRP -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak 55 dBm peak EIRP NFC: 42 dBA/m at 10 m Bluetooth®: +4 dBm (class 2)
Technology Rear Seat Entertainment System
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS)
General notes 31
Frequency range
Bluetooth®: 24002483.5 MHz WLAN 2.4 GHZ: 24002483.5 MHz WLAN 5 GHz: 51505250 MHz 57255875 MHz
E-GSM (900 MHz) GSM (1800 MHz)
UMTS (Band I, III, VIII)
LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28)
GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3)
Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
Bluetooth®: -0.8 dBm WLAN 2.4 GHZ: 14.5 dBm WLAN 5 GHz: 20.5 dBm 13.3 dBm +33 dBm +30 dBm +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB) +23 dBm (±2 dB) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
< +23 dBm (±1 dB)
32 General notes
Technology
Frequency range LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) GNSS (15591610 MHz)
Transmission output/magnetic eld strength < +23 dBm (±1 dB) Receiving only
Information about the speci c absorption rate For France only:
The values were determined and tested in accord- regarding the indication of the speci c absorption
ance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline
rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.
Information about the speci c absorption rate
Vehicle component (designation in accordance with EU DoC)
SAR value in W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg
Hermes 2.1
< 0.4 W/kg
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg
DAI RSE
1.8 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ
0.7 W/kg
NRCS2P
0.003 W/kg
NTG7RSU
0.07 W/kg
Applicable limit value
2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 4 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg
General notes 33
Vehicle component (designation in accordance with EU DoC)
NTG7 MID, NTG7 HIGH, NTG7 PREMIUM, NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS, NTG7 MID LFT2, NTG7 HIGH LFT2, NTG7 PREMIUM LFT2, NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS LFT2
RAMSES 1.0 and 1.1
NTG6N MID/ENTRY NTG6N HIGH NTG6N HIGH2
SAR value in W/kg 0.08 W/kg
0.036 W/kg 0.199 W/kg
Applicable limit value 2 W/kg
2 W/kg 4 W/kg
Importer information for wireless components
For Moldova only: Importer S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2
For Turkey only: Importer Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.. Genel Merkez
Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman ah Cad. No: 6/1 34522 Esenyurt/stanbul
For Ukraine only: Importer PJSC "AUTOCAPITAL" Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2 01004 Kyiv Ukraine
For the United Kingdom only: Importer Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics Delaware Drive, Tongwell
34 General notes
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England
Jack
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity 1. The undersigned, representing Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, The Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product: 2. a) Name: Jack
Type, Number:
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
B) A 240 580 00 18
C) A 639 580 02 18
D) A 639 580 03 18
E) A 910 580 00 00
F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00
Year of manufacture: 2020
Complies with all relevant provisions
Directive No. 2006/42/EC
b)
Description and purpose of use:
Car jack is intended solely for li ing of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack.
3.
References of harmonized and other standards or speci cations
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435,
Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravicí Place 5. 05.10.2020 Date Engineer Petr Petr [Signature] Director of division ZZ
TIREFIT kit
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity, CE We, Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k.
General notes 35
ul. Fabryczna 20B 55-080 Pietrzykowice Poland (1) hereby declare that the product Electric air pump (2) Models: (3)
5N0 012 615C
5N0 012 615F
9P1 012 615A
9P1 012 615B
1EA 012 615
8P0 012 615A
8P0 012 615E
7P0 012 617A
4L0 012 615
760 012 615
A000583 5001
6898012
3220901 2
8888002 695
meet all the essential requirements for the following guidelines: (4)
2006/42/EC (EC Machinery Directive)
2014/30/EU (EC EMC Directive)
2000/14/EC (EC Outdoor Noise Directive)
Person authorised to compile the technical documents referred to in Annex VII A of Directive 2006/42/EC: Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k. Dominik Gschwender (5) ul. Fabryczna 20B 55-080 Pietrzykowice Poland Applied harmonised standards: (6) DIN EN 12100:2012 / DIN EN ISO 3744:1995 DIN EN 60204-1:2006 / DIN EN ISO 2151:2009 DIN EN 60335-1:2012 / DIN EN ISO 4871:2009 DIN EN 1012-1:2011 / DIN EN ISO13732-1:2008 DIN EN 55012:2010 / DIN EN 61000-6-3:2011 DIN EN 61000-6-1:2016 Other technical standards and speci cations applied: none (7) Pietrzykowice, 23.04.2019 [Signature, D. Gschwender] Dominik Gschwender, general management
Note: this declaration loses its validity if technical or operational changes are made without the consent of the manufacturer.
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data at a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected at a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your Mercedes-Benz service centre.
36 General notes
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following e ects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.
Quali ed specialist workshop A quali ed specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modi cations as well as installations and con-
versions R Work on electronic components
MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service centre.
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:
R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.
R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:
R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-speci c supplements and further supplementary documents
R technical data for the vehicle
R tra c rules and regulations
R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles
Information on the REACH regulation
EU and EFTA countries only:
the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).
MercedesBenz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used
General notes 37
and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to MercedesBenz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.
Further information can be obtained at the following addresses:
R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.
In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par with permanent magnets. These elds can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.
38 General notes
For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:
R Medical aids malfunctioning
R Adverse health e ects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.
When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a distance of at least an arm's length between the medical aid and the following components:
R the power supply equipment
This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for example.
R vehicle components carrying live voltage
This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example.
Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop: R vehicle components carrying live voltage R transmission aerials R multimedia system and sound system
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Implied warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat-
ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the socket ap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code
Data storage
Data processing in the vehicle
Electronic control units Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.
General notes 39
The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.
Personal data Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle identi cation number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number.
Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about,
for example, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal o ence.
Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.
This includes the following data, for example:
R vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display
R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units o en contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored:
R operating status of system components, such as ll levels, tyre pressure or battery status
R malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes
R system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
R information on events leading to vehicle damage
40 General notes
R charge level of the high-voltage battery, estimated range
In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.
If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identi cation number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.
In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle
identi cation number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.
Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example:
R seat and steering wheel positions
R suspension and climate control settings
R individual settings, such as interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example:
R multimedia data, such as music, lms or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
R entered navigation destinations
R data about the use of Internet services
These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.
This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.
General notes 41
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.
This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.
Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and
used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.
Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no in uence on the content exchanged.
For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.
42 General notes
Data protection rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on o er, you are entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service o ers. There you will also nd the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection o cers.
At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
Copyright
Information on licences for free and open-source so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Occupant safety 43
Restraint system
Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following components:
R Seat belt system
R Airbags
R Child restraint system
R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:
R Fasten seat belts correctly.
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible.
R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Limitations of the protection provided by the restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modi cations to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.
# Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their so ware.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
44 Occupant safety
Restraint system functionality
When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does
not light up when the vehicle is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Function of the restraint system in an accident
How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the
components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured a er a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle su ers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in su ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
R Knee airbag: frontal impact
Occupant safety 45
R Side airbag: side impact
R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 53).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components
The airbag parts are hot a er an airbag has been deployed.
# Do not touch the airbag parts.
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazard-
ous to health but may cause short-term breathing di culties to persons su ering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing di culties.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.
# Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 102).
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t tightly and snugly across the body.
R The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible.
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
46 Occupant safety
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 58).
Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 118).
Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.
# Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modi ed seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:
R the seat belt is damaged, has been modied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
R modi cations have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modi ed seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.
# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked immediately a er an accident at a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.
Occupant safety 47
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corresponding seat.
% A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 45).
48 Occupant safety
* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner.
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
% Observe the notes on stowage areas (/ page 118). Information on tting a child restraint system and on children travelling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 62).
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: a er a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjust-
ment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 48).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Releasing seat belts
# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.
In addition, a warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. Function of the rear seat belt status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.
When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.
You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the le hand side of the steering wheel (/ page 248).
If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.
In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel.
Airbags Overview of airbags
1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window airbag 5 Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
Occupant safety 49
Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage R Window airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the codriver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 75). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74).
50 Occupant safety
Information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 53).
* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:
R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Protection provided by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection o ered by a correctly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following:
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags.
R Observe the following information.
# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular:
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible.
When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 102).
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.
R The occupants must always keep their feet on the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 58).
R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular:
R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R There are no accessories, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g.
on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
Limitations of the protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly.
# Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not a x objects to it.
Occupant safety 51
The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 49).
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag.
The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.
# Always stow and secure objects correctly.
# Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.
52 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended.
In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto could be restricted.
# You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modi cations or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.
# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
# Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protection. # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed
specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
# Do not store any objects under the codriver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 75). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74).
A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:
R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 45).
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
Occupant safety 53
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations:
R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:
R the classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
R the person is seated correctly.
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classication of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place a er the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.
Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 53).
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side (/ page 74).
54 Occupant safety
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shuto When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.
The status of the front passenger airbag is displayed via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps a er the self-test:
R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds.
R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be o .
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not t a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.
A er tting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 74).
Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not t the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat.
Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.
A er tting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depending on the
Occupant safety 55
child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o . Always observe the following information.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could:
R come into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child
restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 74).
If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o , depending on the person's stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains o , depending on the classi cation.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o : move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.
56 Occupant safety
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:
R The classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
R The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt.
R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:
R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 74)
R Suitable positioning of the child restraint system (/ page 62)
PRE-SAFE® system
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE® can implement the following measures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
R Closing the side windows.
R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occu-
Occupant safety 57
pants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher ashing frequency.
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits
The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:
R when reversing
The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations:
R whilst driving
or
R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist
Automatic measures a er an accident Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R automatic braking (post-collision brake) R activating the hazard warning lights R triggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 289) R switching o the drive system and high-volt-
age on-board electrical system R unlocking the vehicle doors R lowering the side windows R displaying the emergency guide in the multi-
media system display R switching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it.
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.
The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions:
R braking more strongly than automatic braking
R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle
% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the speci c situation. In this way you can recognise potential risks and avoid dangers if children are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 58).
58 Occupant safety
Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:
R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for tting a child restraint system (/ page 62).
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a child restraint system to a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system
The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:
R a baby car seat
R a rearward-facing child seat
R a forward-facing child seat
R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test speci cations and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (/ page 63).
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages
Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system is preferred.
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of tting the child restraint system incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 67).
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system correctly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.
# Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
Occupant safety 59
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted or not secured, it can come loose.
The child restraint system could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants.
# Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c information:
- Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat (/ page 67).
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 72).
60 Occupant safety
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 75). Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 74).
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 53).
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
R Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.
# Never modify a child restraint system.
# Only a x accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
MercedesBenz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.
It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.
# Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could su er burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system.
# Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
# Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Occupant safety 61
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
Securing with ISOFIX
Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)
Type1
BABY SAFE plus
Size category
E
Approval
E1 04 301 146
Order number2
B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Overview of recommended child restraint systems
% Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)
Type1
DUO plus
Size category
B1
Approval
E1 04 301 133
Order number2
A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
62 Occupant safety
Securing with the vehicle seat belt
Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)
Type1
BABY SAFE plus II
Approval
E1 04 301 146
Order number2
A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)
Type1
DUO plus
Approval
E1 04 301 133
Order number2
A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)
Type1
KIDFIX XP
Approval
E1 04 301 304
Order number2
A 000 970 49 02
Type1
AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval
E1 04 301 304
Order number2
A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for tting a child restraint system
Le /right rear seat
Second row of seats (le and right seat), preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/ page 64)
or
° i-Size child seat securing system (/ page 66)
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 69).
Third row of seats, preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/ page 64) ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 69).
Le /right rear seat (second and third seat row) alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 71)
Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 71)
Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 53).
R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 52).
Centre rear seat (second seat row) Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 71)
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44
Approval categories for child restraint systems
Only use approved child restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:
R UN-R44
R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Identi cation on the child restraint system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint system.
There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system.
Example of an approval label
R Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.
Occupant safety 63
The identi cation IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.
R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
R Vehicle-speci c: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-speci c" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
64 Occupant safety Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129
Example of an approval label R iSize: child restraint systems in the "iSize"
category are approved for installation in vehicles with iSize mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled iU.
The identi cation iU refers to iSize child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.
Observe the suitability of vehicle seats
Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats:
R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems (/ page 64)
R Suitability of seats for securing iSize child restraint systems (/ page 66).
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems (/ page 71)
Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the le and right rear seats
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.
® The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 63).
Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.
Carry cot for second and third rows of seats
Size class
Le /right rear seat
Equipment
F ISO/L1
X
G ISO/L2
X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.
Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months) for second and third rows of seats
Size class Equipment
Le /right rear seat
E ISO/R1
IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) for second row of seats
Size class
Le /right rear seat
Equipment
E ISO/R1
IL
D ISO/R2,
IL
ISO/R2X
Size class Equipment
Le /right rear seat
C ISO/R3
IL (1)
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.
Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) for third row of seats
Size class
Le /right rear seat
Equipment
E ISO/R1
IL
D ISO/R2,
X
ISO/R2X
Occupant safety 65
Size class Equipment
Le /right rear seat
C ISO/R3
X
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.
Weight group 1 (918 kg and approx. 9 months up to 4 years) for second row of seats
Size class
Le /right rear seat
Equipment
D ISO/R2,
IL
ISO/R2X
C ISO/R3
IL (1)
B ISO/F2
IUF
B1 ISO/F2X
IUF
66 Occupant safety
Size class Equipment
Le /right rear seat
A ISO/F3
IUF
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.
Weight group 1 (918 kg and approx. 9 months up to 4 years) for third row of seats
Size class Equipment
Le /right rear seat
D ISO/R2,
X
ISO/R2X
C ISO/R3
X
B ISO/F2
IUF
B1 ISO/F2X
IUF
A ISO/F3
IUF
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching iSize child restraint systems
iSize is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.
° The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an iSize child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 (/ page 63).
Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/ page 64) or UN R129 as per the following iSize tables may be attached.
iSize child restraint systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
Front passenger seat
Le /right rear seat (second row of seats only)
X
iU
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.
i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
Fitting the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system on the le and right rear seats
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.
# If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.
# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:
R in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used
R on a label on the child restraint system, if present
Occupant safety 67
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.
When tting a child restraint system, observe the following:
O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.
ISOFIX child seat securing system (/ page 64)
or
iSize child seat securing system (/ page 66)
O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
® When tting an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following:
O When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint
68 Occupant safety
system in weight group 1 on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O When using a child restraint system on a seat on the third row of seats: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system and move the seat backrest of the front seat into an upright position if necessary.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
° When tting an iSize child restraint system, also observe the following:
O When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
# Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the iSize child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
Rear bench seat (second row of seats):
Vehicles with a third row of seats:
1 ISOFIX mounting bracket 2 iSize mounting bracket
# Attach the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to both ISOFIX mounting brackets 1.
Occupant safety 69
Fastening a Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked a er Top Tether belts are tted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.
As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries.
# Always lock rear seat backrests a er tting Top Tether belts.
# Observe the lock veri cation indicator.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child
70 Occupant safety
restraint system attached with ISOFIX or iSize and the vehicle.
The Top Tether anchorages for the second row of seats are located on the rear side of the two outer rear seats on the second row of seats. For the third row of seats, use the Top Tether anchorage on the rear side of the seat backrest on the third row of seats.
Second row of seats
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 111).
# Fit the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars.
# Hook Top Tether hook 3 into Top Tether anchorage 2 without twisting.
# Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 111). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching beltsecured child restraint systems
Rear seats (second seat row) Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Rear seats (third seat row) Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Occupant safety 71
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Le /right rear seat
U, L
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat R If it is absolutely necessary for you to t a
child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 75).
72 Occupant safety
R Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 53).
Front passenger seat Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
X
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
X
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shuto . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.
When tting a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 71).
O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearwardfacing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a weight category I forwardfacing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.
Occupant safety 73
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.
74 Occupant safety
Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto
Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.
Make sure you observe the following information:
R Never t a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat
R Always t a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
- Seats suitable for attaching belted child restraint systems (/ page 71).
- Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 72).
R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74)
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 75).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor
Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:
R If it is absolutely necessary to t a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 52).
R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 53).
Occupant safety 75
R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is enabled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat
When tting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following:
O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74).
O Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 71).
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction.
76 Occupant safety
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could a ect the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto.
# Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system.
# Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly tted.
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest
position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
# If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
Occupant safety 77
# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.
78 Occupant safety
Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows
R indicator lamp 1 is o : via the switch on
the corresponding rear door or driver's door
# To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases:
R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door
Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals le unsecured or unattended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.
An animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
R switch systems on or o and endanger other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.
# Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.
Key Overview of key functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic elds
# Keep the key away from strong magnetic elds.
Vehicle key 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp
Opening and closing 79
3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate
% If indicator lamp 2 does not light up a er pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery (/ page 81).
The key locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Socket ap R Tailgate
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Antithe protection is primed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can a ect the key's functionality.
80 Opening and closing
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking veri cation signal
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.
% Please observe: The selected setting for the acoustic locking veri cation signal must comply with the relevant national road and tra c regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking veri cation signal is forbidden by tra c laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road tra c regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the key:
R Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and socket ap
# To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp ashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and socket ap has been selected:
R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the socket ap are unlocked.
Deactivating the function of the key
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available.
You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you
do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
# To deactivate: press the ß button on the key twice in quick succession. The key indicator lamp ashes twice brie y and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the key.
% When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre console, the function of the key is automatically activated (/ page 160).
Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key
# Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
# Press release button 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.
Inserting the emergency key # Press release button 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring.
Replacing the key battery
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If the cap and/or the battery compart-
ment does not close securely, do not use the key any longer and keep it out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Opening and closing 81
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 81).
82 Opening and closing
# Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this.
# Push in battery compartment 3.
# Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages.
Problems with the key, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 79).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 81).
# Use the replacement key. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 86). # Have the key checked at a quali ed specialist
workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
You have lost a key # Have the key deactivated at a quali ed spe-
cialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Doors Notes on the additional door lock
The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.
& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
# Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle.
# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock.
The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations:
R The vehicle is locked using the key.
R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated (/ page 282).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. % A er locking you can issue a signal with the
horn.
You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle (/ page 101). Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside # United Kingdom only: observe the notes on
the additional door lock (/ page 82).
# Pull door handle 1.
Opening and closing 83 Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
# To unlock: press button 1. # To lock: press button 2.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.
84 Opening and closing
The socket ap is also locked and unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a key is detected in the car. The vehicle is not unlocked: R if you have locked the vehicle using the key R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO
Requirements: R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m. R The driver's door and the door on which the
door handle is used are closed.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
or # Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
Observe the notes: R on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 305)
R on using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 307)
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed.
Opening and closing 85
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 94).
If you open the tailgate from outside, it is automatically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the key has been deactivated. R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 80). # Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 79). # Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 81). # Use the replacement key. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 86). # Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.
86 Opening and closing
In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R while the vehicle is being tow-started or
pushed R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key
% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, rst press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 81).
# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover.
# Pull and hold the door handle.
# Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
# Release the door handle.
# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated rmly.
Locking the front passenger door and rear doors
# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Opening and closing 87 Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
# To lock the le -hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go.
Load compartment Opening the tailgate
* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is su cient space
behind and above the tailgate.
# Press the top of the Mercedes star. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a
kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 90).
# Pull remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate opens.
or
# Press and hold the p button on the key. # If the tailgate is unlocked, press the top of the
Mercedes star.
88 Opening and closing
# If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.
If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
Closing the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the tailgate will not be locked.
Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the following situation:
R You have locked the vehicle and close the tailgate while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle.
and
R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.
Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
# To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate downwards with the handle and let it drop into the lock.
Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate
Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
R Press the p button on the key.
R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
R Press the top of the Mercedes star on the tailgate.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. # To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate down-
wards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.
# Switch on the power supply or the vehicle.
Opening and closing 89
# Push remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate is fully closed.
# Press closing button 1 on the tailgate.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
# Press locking button 2 on the tailgate. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.
# Press and hold the p button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
# Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 90).
Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
90 Opening and closing
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react: R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers R towards the end of the closing procedure
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the
closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press the p button on the key. R Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate. R Press the top of the Mercedes star on the
tailgate.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 87) and closing (/ page 88) the tailgate. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is
opening or closing.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
or # Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing rmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The key is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle
while performing the kicking movement.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.
1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.
Opening and closing 91
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:
R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
R The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.
The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations:
R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. a charging cable or luggage.
R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
R A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 80) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to a point shortly before the end position.
# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position.
# Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the top part of the Mercedes star on the tailgate again a er it has stopped automatically.
Deactivating the opening angle limiter
# Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short acoustic signals sound.
92 Opening and closing Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key Requirements: R The rear seat backrest has been folded
forward. R The load compartment cover has been
removed.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 81).
# Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked.
Side windows Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.
# Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.
Opening and closing 93
1 Closing 2 To open
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.
# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched o , you can continue to operate the side windows.
This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
R during resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
Automatic function of the side windows
In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched o: R if it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. R in extreme temperatures R a er a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.
94 Opening and closing
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open.
If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. A er another automatic closing process, the automatic function for the sunroof and side windows may be deactivated. The automatic function will be active again the next time the vehicle is started.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
Requirements: R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
R The vehicle is unlocked.
R The side windows are opened.
R The panoramic sliding roof is opened.
R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened rst.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button.
# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Requirements: R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
# Press and hold the ß button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
R The vehicle is locked.
R The side windows are closed.
R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button.
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ß button again.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 84).
Resolving problems with the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately a er it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.
Opening and closing 95
A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.
# Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
# Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
# Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 79).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 81).
Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
# Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.
96 Opening and closing
# During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# When a roof luggage rack is tted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
1 Raise 2 Open 3 Close/lower
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open.
Opening and closing 97
# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is tted.
# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: brie y press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not react:
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
R towards the end of the closing procedure.
R during resetting.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
98 Opening and closing
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched o in the following situations:
R if it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
R in extreme temperatures
R a er a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.
Rain-closing feature when driving Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.
Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
# If somebody becomes trapped, brie y push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards.
% By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering".
Opening and closing 99
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately a er it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately a er automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:
# Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.
# Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind
# Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
# Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-the protection Function of the immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.
ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the tailgate is opened R when the bonnet is opened R when interior protection is triggered
(/ page 101)
100 Opening and closing
R when tow-away protection is triggered (/ page 100)
The ATA system is primed automatically a er approximately ten seconds in the following situations: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is primed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:
R a er unlocking the vehicle with the key
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre (/ page 289).
Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
key.
or
# Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the key
outside the vehicle.
Function of tow-away protection
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed. Tow-away protection is automatically primed a er approximately 60 seconds: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed: R doors R tailgate
Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the
key
Opening and closing 101
R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 195).
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to prime or deactivate tow-away protection.
Function of interior protection
When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is primed automatically a er approximately ten seconds: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed: R doors R tailgate
Interior protection is automatically deactivated: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the
key R a er pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R when there are moving objects such as mas-
cots in the vehicle interior R when a side window is open R when a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Priming/deactivating interior protection
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to prime or deactivate interior protection.
102 Seats and stowing
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration:
R You are sitting in an upright position
R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint
R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
R You can move your legs freely
R You can see all the displays on the instrument cluster clearly
R You have a good overview of the tra c conditions
R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area
Notes on the height limit on the third row of seats
& WARNING Risk of injury if height limit on the third row is not observed
If a person exceeds the permissible body size for the seats in the third row of seats, he or she may be injured through contact with the roof or parts of the vehicle interior. For that reason, a person of the relevant height must not use the seats on the third row. # Use a suitable vehicle seat.
The seats on the third row are approved only for people up to 1.68 m in height. Observe the information regarding height on the information label.
Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (without Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.
Seats and stowing 103
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
104 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints tted.
# Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage.
# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
# Do not store any objects under the codriver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position
Seats and stowing 105
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package) Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position
# Li lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2
until the desired position has been reached.
106 Seats and stowing
# Li lever 2 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion length (driver's
seat only): li lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
# To adjust the seat cushion inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-a position
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 117).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1 Higher 2 So er 3 Lower 4 Firmer # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of
the backrest.
Adjusting rear seats mechanically
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards. There is a risk of the following, in particular: R The vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer ful l its function as intended.
R The seat backrest will not be able restrain objects or goods in the load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat and seat backrest are engaged, in particular: R Before persons travel in the vehicle while
sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature R A er the seat has been adjusted. R A er the easy entry and exit feature has been used R A er the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the rear seats while driving
You or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Adjust the rear seats before starting the drive system.
Seats and stowing 107
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the rear seats
When adjusting the fore-and-a position, the rear seats and/or the object can be damaged. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
This function is available only for vehicles with a movable rear bench seat. The components of the rear bench seat can be moved. You can move the right-hand and le -hand parts together with the centre part independently of each other. This allows you to make the footwell larger in either the second or third row of seats.
108 Seats and stowing
# Li release handle 1 and slide the corresponding part of the bench seat into the desired position.
# Let go of release handle 1. # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Adjusting the rear seat backrests mechanically
& WARNING Risk of injury due to seat backrests folded forwards
If the seat backrest of the rear seat is folded forwards, persons in the third row of seats may hit parts of the seat mechanism, especially in the event of an accident, braking manoeuvre or abrupt change of direction.
# If there is a person in the third row of seats, the rear seat in front of them must be folded back to the driving position before the journey begins.
# Persons in the third row of seats should not rest their legs on a seat backrest that has been folded forwards.
You can fold the backrests of the second row of seats forwards to get in or out.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded forwards. The seat can fold backwards unexpectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident.
People in the seat's sweep can become trapped.
# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold it back before driving o .
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Requirements: R The area into which the seat is folded is clear.
Adjusting the seat backrest
You can fold the seat backrests on the second row of seats forwards for the following situations:
R For easier access to the luggage compartment
R Vehicles with a third row of seats: for getting in or out
You can set the seat backrest to di erent angles.
If you no longer require the seat backrest to be folded down for loading or for getting in and out, fold it back into place.
# Hold the seat backrest in place with your hand or back.
# Gently pull one of release loops 1 and fold the seat backrest forwards or backwards.
# Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged.
Folding the seat backrest forwards to enter the vehicle (vehicles with a third row of seats)
& WARNING Risk of injury when folding the seat backrest on the second row of seats forwards
If the handle for the seat backrest on the second row of seats is pulled from the third row of seats, the seat backrest on the second row of seats will fold forwards and will not engage. People in the sweep of this seat backrest can become trapped.
# When getting out of the third row of seats, do not hold the seat backrest on the second row of seats.
Vehicles with EASY-ENTRY function: If a seat on the second row of seats is located in the EASYENTRY area, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.
# If necessary, fold the seats on the third row into position (/ page 125).
Seats and stowing 109
# Pull handle 1. The seat backrest will fold forwards.
* NOTE Damage to the seat backrest handle caused by pulling
The handle can be damaged if it is used to pull the seat forwards.
110 Seats and stowing
# Move the seat forwards by the seat backrest.
# Move the seat forwards by the seat backrest. Hold the seat rmly in place while doing so.
Folding the seat backrest back to the upright position (vehicles with third row of seats) # Swivel seat backrest back until it engages.
The seat backrest will remain in the cargo position. # Slide the seat backwards. The seat will stop in the front position. # Move the seat into the desired position (/ page 107).
# If necessary, fold in the seats on the third row (/ page 123).
% To increase the size of the luggage compartment, you can move the seat backrests into the luggage compartment oor position (/ page 121).
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints manually
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints tted.
# Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
# To move the driver's head restraint backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards.
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically
# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
# To move the driver's head restraint forwards: press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint forwards.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
Seats and stowing 111
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
# If the centre seat on the second row of seats is not occupied: press the head restraint down all the way.
Vehicles with a third row of seats The head restraints on the third row of seats have a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the extended, top position in which the head restraint engages; the non-usage position is the bottom, retracted position of the head restraint. If the seats on the third row of seats are being used, the head restraint must be in the top, engaged usage position.
# If the third row of seats is occupied: move the head restraints to the very top and have them engage there.
# If the third row of seats is not occupied: move the head restraints to the very bottom.
112 Seats and stowing Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints Removing
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 121).
# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.
# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the notches
on the bar are on the le when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
Con guring the seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort
Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.
Selecting the massage programme for the front seats
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High
intensity on or o .
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort # Select Î for the desired seat. # Con rm the prompt.
Switching the seat heating on/o
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or docu-
ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.
# Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
Seats and stowing 113
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o .
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches o .
Switching the seat ventilation on/o
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
114 Seats and stowing
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched o.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Unlocking
# Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.
Locking # Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering col-
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Switching the steering wheel heater on/o Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.
# Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the vehicle o , the steering wheel heater will switch o .
Seats and stowing 115
Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process
is complete before driving o .
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no-one has any body parts in
the range of movement of the seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process will be stopped.
116 Seats and stowing
You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature
Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver's seat will move backwards and the backrest will be moved to a steeper position when:
R You switch the ignition o when the driver's door is open
R You open the driver's door when the ignition is switched o
% The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already at the front of the backrest adjustment range.
The driver's seat will move back to the last drive position when:
R You switch the ignition on with the driver's door closed.
R You close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on
The last drive position will be saved when:
R You switch the ignition o .
R You call up the seat settings via the memory function.
R You save the seat settings via the memory function.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic seat adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.
Memory function Function of the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped.
# During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the ignition is switched o . Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat R Seat contour R Outside mirrors R Head-up display
Seats and stowing 117 Operating the memory function Storing
# Set the desired position for all systems. # Brie y press memory button V and then
press preset position 4, T or U within three seconds.
118 Seats and stowing
# To call up: press and brie y hold one of preset position buttons 4, T or U. A er releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.
& WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell and frontpassenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell.
# Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient clearance for the pedals.
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not lay multiple oor mats on top of one another.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shuto : objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or damage the system. Please observe the notes on
the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 52).
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be ung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the
cup holder is closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear
seat armrest.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment oor
If you drive with the load compartment oor open, objects could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the load compartment oor
before a journey.
Seats and stowing 119
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, ammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
120 Seats and stowing
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:
R never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants).
Information can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 350).
R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
R always use the partition net when transporting objects in the load compartment.
R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly.
Notes on driving with a roof load
R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle.
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 167).
% For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front stowage compartments
1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be a 12 V socket in the stowage compartment 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port 4 Glove compartment
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded forwards. The seat can fold backwards unexpectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident. People in the seat's sweep can become trapped.
Seats and stowing 121
# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold it back before driving o .
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place.
Requirements: R The area into which the seat is folded is clear.
R The area under the rear bench seat is clear.
R The armrest on the second row of seats is folded back and the cup holders are empty.
# Trap the seat belt strap on seat belt 2 in seat belt strap holder 1.
When the le -hand seat backrest is folded forwards, the centre seat backrest will also be folded forwards.
122 Seats and stowing
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
# If necessary, release the head restraints for the seat backrest and push them down (/ page 111).
# Le and right seat backrests: pull one of release loops 1. The seat backrest will automatically fold forwards.
# Centre seat backrest: pull release loop 2. The seat backrest will automatically fold forwards.
% When the seat backrests on the second and third rows of seats are folded forwards, you can push the rear bench seat on the second row of seats back. This will then provide a continuous load compartment surface.
Ensure that the area between the rows of seats is clear.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest.
Seats and stowing 123
If the le and centre seat backrests have been folded forwards together, fold the le seat backrest back rst.
Folding the seat backrest on the third row of seats forwards
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
# Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages. The seat backrest will remain in the cargo position.
# A er the seat backrest has been folded back, check the position of the head restraint and set it to the correct position (/ page 111).
& WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards.
There is a risk of the following, in particular:
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer ful l its function as intended.
124 Seats and stowing
R The seat backrest will not be able restrain objects or goods in the load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat and seat backrest are engaged, in particular: R Before persons travel in the vehicle while
sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature R A er the seat has been adjusted. R A er the easy entry and exit feature has been used R A er the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards
& WARNING Risk of injury due to seat backrests folded forwards
If the seat backrest of the rear seat is folded forwards, persons in the third row of seats may hit parts of the seat mechanism, especially in the event of an accident, braking manoeuvre or abrupt change of direction. # If there is a person in the third row of
seats, the rear seat in front of them must
be folded back to the driving position before the journey begins.
# Persons in the third row of seats should not rest their legs on a seat backrest that has been folded forwards.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
You can fold the backrests of the second row of seats forwards to get in or out.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded forwards. The seat can fold backwards unexpectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident.
People in the seat's sweep can become trapped.
# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold it back before driving o .
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Requirements: R The area into which the seat is folded is clear.
R The area under the third row of seats is clear.
R The cup holders are empty when the seat backrests on the third row of seats are folded forwards.
R The load compartment cover is removed when the seat backrests on the second row of seats are folded forwards.
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place.
Seats and stowing 125
row of seats back. This will then provide a continuous load compartment surface. Ensure that the area between the rows of seats is clear.
Folding back the seat backrest on the third row of seats
# Trap the seat belt strap on seat belt 2 in seat belt strap holder 1.
* NOTE Damage to the release loops due to the attachment of objects
The release loops of the seat backrests in the rear may be damaged due to the attachment of objects. # Only attach objects to the tie-down eyes.
The release loops are located in the load compartment to the side of the bottom part of the seat backrests.
Release loops on the rear sides
# Move the second row of seats forwards and move the seat backrests into the cargo position (/ page 126).
# Release the head restraints on the third row of seats and push them down (/ page 111).
# Pull one of red release loops 1. The seat backrest will automatically fold forwards.
# Push the seat backrest down until it engages.
% When the seat backrests on the second and third rows of seats are folded forwards, you can push the rear bench seat on the second
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.
126 Seats and stowing
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat backrest.
Requirements: R The seats and the seat backrests on the sec-
ond row of seats have been moved forwards su ciently. * NOTE Damage to the release loops due to
the attachment of objects The release loops of the seat backrests in the rear may be damaged due to the attachment of objects. # Only attach objects to the tie-down eyes.
Loops on the rear sides # Brie y pull one of red release loops 2.
# To fold the le or right seat backrest back: pull one of black release loops 1.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backrests (cargo position) To enlarge the load compartment, you can move the seat backrests on the second row of seats into a steeper angle (cargo position).
# Setting the seat backrest: hold the seat backrest 1 in place with your hand or back.
# Gently pull one of the release loops 2 and fold the seat backrest forwards.
Load compartment cover
Notes on the load compartment cover
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover.
* NOTE Damage to the load compartment cover when loading the vehicle
The load compartment cover may be damaged when the vehicle is being loaded.
# Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the load compartment cover.
Vehicles with a third row of seats: when the third row of seats is in use, the load compartment cover on the seat backrests on the second row of seats is removed.
Seats and stowing 127 Extending/retracting the load compartment cover
# To extend: pull the load compartment cover back by grab handle 1 and clip it into holders 2 on the le and right.
Retracting # Release the load compartment cover from
holders 2 on the le and right.
128 Seats and stowing
# Guide the load compartment cover forwards using grab handle 1 until it is fully retracted.
Fitting or removing the load compartment cover Requirements: R The load compartment cover is rolled up. Removing the load compartment cover
# Press in the end cap of the load compartment cover 1 on the right- and le -hand side in the direction of the arrow using the handle on the lower edge 3.
# Push the load compartment cover 1 into the anchorage 2 on the opposite side.
# Take the load compartment cover 1 out by pulling it upwards.
Fitting the load compartment cover
# Place the load compartment cover 1 in the anchorage 2 on the right- or le -hand side.
# Press in the end cap of the load compartment cover 1 on the opposite side and insert the
load compartment cover 1 into the other anchorage 2.
Attaching/removing the partitioning net
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the partitioning net.
For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load.
Damaged partitioning nets can no longer ful l their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualied specialist workshop.
Attaching
Seats and stowing 129
# With load compartment enlargement: attach hooks 3 to tie-down eyes 4 on the le and right in such a way that hooks 3 point to the door.
# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at the same time until the partitioning net 1 is tight and the top edge of partitioning net 1 is horizontal.
Partitioning net without load compartment enlargement
Partitioning net with load compartment enlargement
# Hook partition net 1 into holders 2 on the le and right on the roof lining.
# Without load compartment enlargement: attach hooks 3 to tie-down eyes 4 on the le and right in such a way that hooks 3 point backwards.
130 Seats and stowing Removing
# Turn the buckle of the lashing strap in the direction of arrow 6.
# Slide the loose end of the lashing strap into the buckle in the direction of arrow 5 until the lashing straps are loose.
# Remove hooks 3 from tie-down eyes 4 on the le and right.
# Remove partitioning net 1 from brackets 2 on the roof lining on the le and right.
Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).
Overview of bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be ung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods to them.
1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)
1 Bag hook
Overview of clothes hooks on the tailgate Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).
1 Clothes hook
The clothes hooks are not suitable for hanging heavy objects as this can cause the tailgate to lower automatically. Use the clothes hooks only for light objects such as jackets.
Seats and stowing 131
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will nd information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.
132 Seats and stowing
# Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is tted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 167).
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof railing.
# Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Sockets Using the 12 V socket
Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the stowage compartment in the front
centre console R In the stowage compartment under the front
armrest R In the load compartment
Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console # Fold up socket cap 1. # Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the stowage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to a damaged connecting cable or a damaged socket
You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.
# Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.
# When the vehicle is switched o , make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry.
# Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali ed specialised workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
& DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly
In particular, you could receive an electric shock: R if you touch the inside of the socket R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket
# Do not touch the inside of the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket. When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket ap closed.
Seats and stowing 133 Requirements: R The device is equipped with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards speci c to the country you are in. R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (1.3 A) is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Open socket ap 3.
134 Seats and stowing
# Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is su cient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
Using the 230 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damage from a connecting cable or socket
You could receive an electric shock when pulling the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket out of the trim, or if it is damaged or wet.
# Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.
# When the vehicle is switched o , make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
# Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
& DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly
In particular, you could receive an electric shock: R if you touch the inside of the socket R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket
# Do not touch the inside of the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Make sure that no liquids get into the 230 V socket. When the 230 V socket is not in use, keep the socket ap closed.
Requirements: R The device is equipped with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards speci c to the country you are in. R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (0.65 A) is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Open socket ap 3.
# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is su cient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
Overview of USB ports
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports:
R in the stowage compartment of the cockpit armrest (/ page 120)
R in the front centre console next to the mobile phone stowage compartment
R in the rear centre console
R vehicles with three seat rows: in the side stowage compartment of the load compartment
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear centre console may vary.
When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Seats and stowing 135
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of re from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a re hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place
any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal.
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic elds.
136 Seats and stowing
# Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic elds in the mobile phone stowage compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.
The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed:
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.
R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on.
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.
R Large mobile phones which do not rest at in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
R To ensure more e cient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.
Charging a mobile phone wirelessly
Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging.
A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com.
# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of the marked surface on mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
Stowage compartment without cover Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from falling out while you are driving.
Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements.
Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br
# Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.
Seats and stowing 137
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.
# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out.
Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure de ned in Directive 242/2000 by the
Fitting/removing the oor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.
# To t: slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the oor mat in the footwell.
# Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
# Adjust the corresponding seat.
138 Seats and stowing
# To remove: slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the oor mat o holders 2.
# Remove the oor mat.
Exterior lighting
Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad
It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which tra c drives on the other side of the road.
Light switch Operating the light switch
Information about lighting systems and your responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and tra c situation.
1 W Le -hand parking lights
2 X Right-hand parking lights
3 T Standing lights and licence plate lighting
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)
Light and sight 139
5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using su cient
lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X
or le W parking light.
For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position.
140 Light and sight
If the battery is insu ciently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched o automatically to facilitate the next drive system start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch o automatically when the driver's door is opened.
R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 142).
Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights are switched on automatically depending on the light conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched o in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or o
Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion.
# Press the R button.
Please observe the country-speci c laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the lights
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 Headlamp ashing 4 Turn signal light, le # Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
Switching on high beam
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.
Switching o high beam
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3.
Headlamp ashing
# Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.
Turn signal light
# To indicate brie y: push the combination switch brie y to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will ash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
# Press button 1.
Light and sight 141
The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if: R the airbag has been deployed. R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of
more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch o automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o the hazard warning light system using button 1.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time
Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Ext. light. del. sw. off # Set the switch-o delay time.
When the vehicle engine is switched o , the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.
142 Light and sight
Switching the surround lighting on/o
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Surround lighting
When Surround lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1 p Front le reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp
# To switch on/o : press button 1 5 accordingly.
Control panel in the grab handle
1 p Rear reading lamp # To switch on/o : press button 1. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting Setting the colour # Select Colour. # Set the desired colour.
Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.
Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness zones. # Switch the function on or o . or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.
Activating multi-coloured lighting # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour. # Select a colour combination.
Activating multi-coloured animation # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour animat..
The chosen colour combination will change at prede ned intervals.
Activating welcome lighting
# Select Colour.
# Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run.
Activating the charge visualisation
# Select Colour.
# Select charge visualisation. The ambient lighting provides visual feedback on the di erent states of charge when the vehicle is connected to or disconnected from the charging station.
Activating dependency on air conditioning settings
# Select Colour.
# Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change brie y.
Light and sight 143
Switching the interior lighting switch-o delay time on/o
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Int. light. del. sw. off
# Switch the switch-o delay time on or o . When this function is active, the interior lighting lights up for a short time a er the vehicle is locked.
144 Light and sight
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Switching the windscreen wipers on/o
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
# Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe
R î Wiping with washer uid
% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 305).
Switching the rear window wiper on/o
1 g Windscreen wipers o 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
1 ô Single wipe/washing 2 è Intermittent wiping
# Single wipe: press button 1 to the point of resistance.
# Wiping with washer uid: press button 1 beyond the point of resistance.
Light and sight 145
# Switching intermittent wiping on/o : press button 2. The è symbol will appear on the instrument cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 144). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
Removing the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position
# Switch the vehicle on and then o again immediately.
146 Light and sight Fitting the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Press the î button on the combination switch (/ page 144). The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
# Switch o the vehicle.
% Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.
Maintenance display
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
# Remove protective lm 1 from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly tted wiper blades.
When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.
% The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.
Removing the wiper blade # Switch the vehicle o .
Fitting the wiper blade
Light and sight 147
# Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear window until it engages in the replacement position.
# Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction of arrow 3.
# Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper arm.
# Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder 2.
# Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly.
148 Light and sight
# Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window.
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of injury due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Before starting the drive system: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror
The outside mirrors re ect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.
# Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
# To fold in or out: brie y press button 2.
# To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.
# Use button 4 to adjust the position of the mirror glass.
% If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, you will have to reset the outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.
# To reset: brie y press button 2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again as follows:
# Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
# If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.
R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
Light and sight 149
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into antidazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if: R The drive system is switched o . R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function
The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R the parking position is stored (/ page 150). R the front-passenger mirror is selected. R reverse gear is engaged.
150 Light and sight
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:
R you shi the transmission to another transmission position.
R you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.
Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
Calling up # Press button 1 to select the front-passenger
outside mirror. # Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic fold-in on or o .
# Press button 1 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.
# Engage reverse gear.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 2.
Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control
In order for the air conditioning system, monitoring of the pollution level and air ltration to function correctly, an interior air lter must always be used. Make sure that the lter is installed correctly. Use lters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
THERMATIC control panel overview
The indicator lamps on the Ã, ¬, ¤, g, ¿ and & buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.
1 w Sets the temperature 2 A Calls up the air conditioning menu
3 H Sets the air ow or switches o climate control
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic 5 ¬ Demists the windscreen 6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o 8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/o 9 & Activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-
entry climate control" (/ page 155) A _ Sets the air distribution
Climate control 151 THERMOTRONIC control panel overview The indicator lamps on the Ã, ¬, ¤, g, ¿ and & buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.
1 w Sets the temperature on the driver's side
2 A Calls up the air conditioning menu 3 H Sets the air ow or switches o climate
control 4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic
(/ page 152) 5 ¬ Demists the windscreen 6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
152 Climate control
7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o (/ page 153)
8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 152)
9 & Activates/deactivates "Immediate preentry climate control" (/ page 155)
A w Sets the temperature on the front passenger side
Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/o
# To switch on: set the air ow to level 1 or higher using the H button.
# To switch o : set the air ow to level 0 using the H button.
% When the ECO drive program is activated, the climate control functions are restricted to increase the range. This can have an e ect on the warming or cooling of the vehicle interior. In the ECO drive program, the windows may also mist up faster in heating mode (/ page 167).
% If climate control is switched o , the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch o climate control only brie y.
Switching the A/C function on/o using the air conditioning control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿ button.
Switch o the A/C function only brie y; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
Calling up the air conditioning menu
Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the
lower edge of the media display.
Calling up the air-conditioning menu using the button on the climate control panel # Press the A button on the climate control
panel.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Select A/C.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch to manual mode: press the _ or
à button.
Climate control 153
In automatic mode, you can choose between ve di erent air quantities using the H button. Automatic mode is retained.
Setting the air distribution
# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 152).
# To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O.
# Set the air ow. % Several air distributions can be selected, e.g.
to air-condition both the windscreen and the footwell.
Switching the synchronisation function on/o via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats
Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones.
# Select SYNC and switch on or o .
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to mist up: press the
¬ button.
Windows misted up on the outside # Switch on the windscreen wipers. # Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o # Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y.
Pre-entry climate control using the key
Function of pre-entry climate control using the key Before entering the vehicle, the driver's seat area or the whole vehicle interior can be brie y prewarmed or pre-cooled.
When pre-cooling, the following functions are activated as needed:
R Automatic climate control R Blower
R Seat ventilation
When pre-heating, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control
R Blower R Seat heater
R Steering wheel heater
R Mirror heater R Rear window heater
154 Climate control
Setting pre-entry climate control via the key Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
Switching on/o # Select Z.
# Select Pre-entry climate control via key.
Switching pre-entry climate control via the key on/o
Requirements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
ciently. R The function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
# To switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to ve minutes for pre-heating and precooling.
Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be activated more than three times when the vehicle is switched o .
# To switch o : push the & button up or down.
The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation
Pre-entry climate control at departure time
Pre-entry climate control for departure time function
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when the vehicle is parked.
When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the highvoltage battery to a speci ed minimum charge.
The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions:
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment.
R The high-voltage battery is not charged su ciently.
With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.
For cooling, the following functions are activated as needed:
R Automatic climate control
R Blower
R Seat ventilation
For heating, the following functions are activated as needed:
R Automatic climate control
R Blower
R Seat heating R Steering wheel heater R Mirror heater R Rear window heater
Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
Setting a single departure time # Select ONCE. # Set a departure time.
Changing the active departure time # Select the pen icon next to the displayed
departure time. # Set a departure time.
Setting the week pro le # Select WEEK PROFILE. # Set the desired departure times, e.g. every
day at 8 a.m.
Climate control 155
Selecting the zone
# Select Z.
# Select Driver's seat only. If the Driver's seat only setting is deactivated, pre-entry climate control takes place for the entire vehicle.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time
Requirements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
ciently.
R The function has been activated via the multimedia system.
# To activate: set the departure time (/ page 155). Pre-entry climate control for departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another ten minutes if the departure is delayed.
# To deactivate: push the & button up or down.
The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation
% You can also activate the function via the Mercedes me App.
Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
Air-conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 30 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted.
156 Climate control
The colours of the indicator lamp on button & have the following meanings: R Blue: cooling is activated. R Red: heating is activated. R Yellow: the departure time has been preselec-
ted.
# Set the desired temperature using the w button.
# Press button & . The red or blue indicator lamp on button & will light up or go out.
% You can also activate the function via the Mercedes me App.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following:
R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (/ page 305).
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the centre and turn it to the le (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.
# To set the air ow direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the le or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents.
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the centre and turn it to the le or right as far as it will go.
# To set the air ow direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the le or right.
Driving
Notes on electric mode
& WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage battery
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes o with water and seek medical attention straight away.
& DANGER Risk of explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery
Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the event of a vehicle re.
# Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.
Driving and parking 157
# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a su cient distance.
# Call the re brigade.
Observe the following notes on vehicle noise emissions and the acoustic vehicle warning system:
R The vehicle is equipped with a purely electric drive system and develops considerably lower vehicle noise emissions than vehicles with a combustion engine.
It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle warning system (AVAS).
R The sound generator generates speed-dependent vehicle noise emissions when driving forward or backing up at a speed of up to around 30 km/h.
This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better.
R When driving at speeds above 20 km/h The vehicle acoustic warning system gradually switches o .
R Despite the sound generator, the vehicle still may not be heard by other road users. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
R The sound generator is o when the vehicle is stationary.
Manual disconnection of the high-voltage onboard electrical system
& DANGER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged components may cause a re.
158 Driving and parking
In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the highvoltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.
# Never make any modi cations to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or damaged.
# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.
Requirements:
Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the following situations:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up in the Instrument Display, e.g. a er an accident.
R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. a er an accident, and the restraint system components have not been triggered.
Operating the high-voltage disconnect device Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the above-mentioned situations.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Shi the transmission to position j.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Open the bonnet.
# Press release tab 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.
# Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched o .
All work on the drive system (including a er disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical
system manually) may only be carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop.
Switching on the power supply or the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Requirements: R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised. R the brake pedal is not depressed.
Driving and parking 159
# To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windscreen wiper.
The power supply is switched o again if the following conditions are met: R you open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice more.
160 Driving and parking
# To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the instrument cluster.
The vehicle is switched o again if one of the following conditions is met: R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes
and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button
Requirements: R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
# Shi the transmission to position j or i. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1
once. R The vehicle is started. R The display õ appears in the instru-
ment display: the vehicle can be driven.
# If the vehicle does not start: switch o nonessential consumers and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the display message Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual appears in the instrument display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 160).
% You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button 1 for about three seconds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. When you press button 1 again, the vehicle starts again and you can engage drive position h again. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 161).
Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display.
Starting the vehicle with the key in the stowage compartment (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
display message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
Marked space (example with cup holder without cover)
Driving and parking 161
# Open the cover of the marked space 2 if necessary.
# Make sure that the marked space 2 is empty.
# Remove the key 1 from the key ring.
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 on the symbol 3. The vehicle will start a er a short time.
When you remove the key 1 from the marked space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For further engine starts however, the key 1 must be located in the marked space 2 on the symbol 3 during the entire journey.
# Have the key 1 checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start:
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 and leave it there.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
% You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.
Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the multifunction display.
Running-in notes
R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered or a er repairs. Full system e ectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process.
R Brakepads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking e ect and grip a er several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking e ect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R shoes with platform soles
162 Driving and parking
R shoes with high heels R slippers
There is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched o while driving
If you switch o the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may a ect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-
ing.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.
This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.
# Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.
Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.
You should bear the following in mind:
R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Owner's Manual.
R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side
R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up:
R brake occasionally while paying attention to the tra c conditions
R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey
Notes on aquaplaning Aquaplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface.
Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:
R reduce speed
R avoid tyre ruts
R avoid sudden steering movements
R brake carefully
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres (/ page 333).
Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered the vehicle can damage the drive system, electrics and transmission.
Observe the following if you must drive through water:
R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body.
R Drive at walking pace at most; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior.
R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.
Driving and parking 163
The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
ECO display function
The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in adopting an e cient driving style to maximise range. You can in uence energy consumption by doing the following: R driving with particular care (/ page 165) R driving in drive program ; (/ page 167)
164 Driving and parking
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will ll up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Steady speed
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R 3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed
R 2 Heavy braking
R 3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically:
R The three segments will ll up completely at the same time
R The edges around all three segments will light up
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the centre of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a xed reduction in consumption.
Recuperative brake system
Function of the recuperative brake system Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motors are operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion, recuperation in overrun mode is initiated.
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more
electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.
The regenerative brake system has the following characteristics:
R supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting
R converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy
% If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more e ciently energy can be recuperated.
System limits
The braking e ect of the electric motor during recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or may not be available at all in the following situations:
R when the high-voltage battery charge level increases
R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature
R when driving at speeds close to zero
R in transmission position i
R during and a er ESP® intervenes
In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system. Also brake with the service brake if necessary.
Manually setting recuperative deceleration You can use the steering wheel gearshi paddles to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode.
Driving and parking 165
% When the vehicle is started again, the following recuperation level is set:
R hÃ: if hà was selected previously.
R h: if a recuperation level other than hà was selected previously.
The following recuperation levels are available:
R hà Intelligent and anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist (/ page 165)
R hq No recuperation: the vehicle coasts, rolls freely
R h Normal recuperation
R h± Increased recuperation: increased deceleration in overrun mode
R h±± Maximum recuperation: maximum deceleration in overrun mode
# To increase recuperation: brie y pull gearshi paddle 1.
# To reduce recuperation: brie y pull gearshi paddle 2.
# To select hÃ: pull and hold gearshi paddle 1 or 2.
The Instrument Display shows the currently selected recuperation level next to the transmission position display.
ECO Assist function
% ECO Assist is not available in all countries. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent events ahead can be detected.
ECO Assist is active only in hà (/ page 165).
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, use minimal energy and recuperate.
ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 248). If the system detects an event ahead, e.g. a vehicle ahead, and the driving style can be optimised, the event will appear on the instrument display.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following events can also be detected and displayed for the route section ahead:
R Speed limit
166 Driving and parking
R Downhill gradient R Junctions and roundabouts R Bends
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: In order for ECO Assist to react to a speed limit, the automatic adoption of speed limits must be activated (/ page 224). These route events will be detec-
ted only if route-based speed adaptation is active (/ page 213).
1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot o the accelerator" recommendation
The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows:
R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near.
R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away.
If ECO Assist is active, "Foot o the accelerator" symbol 3 will appear on the Assistance menu on the instrument display, on the head-up display and next to the transmission position display.
When the vehicle nears an event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for minimal energy consumption based on the distance and speed. "Foot o the accelerator" recommendation 3 will appear on the instrument display.
If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for minimal energy consumption. The vehicle will recuperate autonomously and thus charge the high-voltage battery.
% You can also manually increase or reduce recuperation. However, ECO Assist is available only in the hà setting (/ page 165).
If there is no response to "Foot o the accelerator" recommendation 3, the segments will remain white.
The event will be shown for a short time a er it has been passed.
If the event involves a vehicle in front, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to "Foot o the accelerator" prompt 3.
Driving and parking 167
If ECO Assist cannot identify a recommendation for adjusting the driving style for the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive.
System limits ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the available map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. You must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system is active.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.
R If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured.
R If the digital road map of the navigation system has incorrect or outdated information.
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
R If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured. R When you drive on roads with steep uphill or
downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs: (/ page 168).
Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: R Drive R Suspension R Steering R ESP® R Climate control
Available drive programs = Individual R The following vehicle characteristics are indi-
vidually adjustable: - Drive - Suspension - Steering
C Sport R Maximum power availability R Stability but with a sporty, dynamic setup R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
168 Driving and parking
A Comfort
R Comfortable driving style R Balance between traction and stability R Best balance between e ciency and perform-
ance for all driving situations R Recommended for all road conditions
; Eco
R Economical setting of vehicle functions R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions R Restricted performance of the climate control
to increase the range (/ page 152) In heating mode, the windows may mist up more quickly. R Maximum permissible speed limited to 130 km/h If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limit is raised to the maximum permissible speed. R When the route option Electric Intelligence is switched on and route guidance is active, a
chequered ag in the speedometer indicates the maximum permissible speed recommended by active range monitoring . It is the driver's own responsibility to comply with them in order to reach the next scheduled charging station .
Notes on the roof load display
Certain drive programs and ESP® settings are unsuitable for transporting a roof load.
If one of these drive programs is set or selected, the W symbol is shown as a warning. When this symbol is shown, the selected drive program is not suitable for transporting a load on the roof.
The following drive programs are a ected:
R Sport drive program
R Individual drive program with the Sport ESP® setting
% The symbol is also shown in the following situations:
R Within the themes if a corresponding drive program is saved
For more information on themes see . R Within the reset display if the previously
active drive program is unsuitable for the transport of a roof load For further information on the reset display, see (/ page 169).
Selecting the drive program
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.
Con guring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I # Select Individual configuration. # Select and set a category.
Switching the restoration display on or o # Switch Ask when starting on or o .
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. % The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard settings.
Driving and parking 169
% This function must be activated for each user pro le separately. The drive program for the respective user pro le of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated.
Transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ # Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ # Select Consumption.
The current and average consumption is displayed.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:
R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.
170 Driving and parking
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the instrument display.
j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of resistance.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
If you want the transmission to remain in neutral N even if the vehicle is switched o :
# Start the vehicle.
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i.
# Release the brake pedal.
# Switch o the vehicle.
% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the transmission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 190).
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
Driving and parking 171
# When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. Park position is only engaged when the transmission position display j is shown in the driver's display. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:
R You switch the vehicle o in transmission position h or k.
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k.
% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and engage transmission position h or k again.
% If you have engaged park position j or switched o the vehicle and no transmission position display is displayed, secure the vehicle from rolling away (/ page 195).
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the rst point of resistance.
Function of the 4MATIC
The exible all-wheel distribution of the 4MATIC means the drive is always ideally distributed between both axles. Depending on the situation, only the front axle or only the rear axle can be driven, or the drive can be distributed continuously between both axles.
This means that recuperation can be used even more e ectively and the range of the vehicle can be increased (/ page 164).
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front,
for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect
of the exible all-wheel distribution can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.
Charging the high-voltage battery Notes on charging the high-voltage battery
* NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural selfdischarge. Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery. # To avoid damage, please observe the fol-
lowing recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.
172 Driving and parking
* NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery
As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of, and the amount of energy available from, the high-voltage battery decreases over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical output can be impaired.
The following factors could accelerate the ageing of the high-voltage battery:
R frequently fully charging (charge level 100%) the high-voltage battery, especially when this process is not directly followed by a journey
R frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient temperatures
# To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.
Recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery:
R Every six months, when the outside temperature is above 10 °C, park the vehicle overnight with a charge level below 20%.
R Only charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) if necessary.
R Charge the high-voltage battery on average to a charge level of 80%. Beyond a charge level of 80%, the charging time is considerably prolonged.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery charge level between 30% and 50%. Do not keep the high-voltage battery continuously connected to power supply equipment.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time avoid, if possible, high ambient temperatures.
R Check the high-voltage battery's charge level every six weeks (/ page 188).
R Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below 20%.
R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. Otherwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery cannot be monitored.
You can contribute to reducing the vehicle's energy consumption in the following ways:
R An anticipatory driving style (/ page 163)
R Reduced use of electrical consumers
R Having the vehicle regularly maintained
The charging time of the high-voltage battery may change over the course of its life.
% Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets. You can charge the high-voltage battery with both alternating current (mode 2/3) and direct current (mode 4).
Combo 1 vehicle socket
Driving and parking 173
Combo 2 vehicle socket
1 Type 1 or type 2 connection for charging with alternating current
2 Socket extension for charging with direct current
% When using a CCS (Combined Charging System) charging cable to charge with direct current at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle
socket connections 1 and 2 are used for charging.
Charging options for the high-voltage battery (mode 2, 3 or 4):
R Charging through recuperation while the vehicle is in motion
R Charging with alternating current when stationary:
- at a mains socket (mode 2)
- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
R Charging with direct current when stationary:
- at a fast charging station (mode 4)
Depending on the country-speci c vehicle equipment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible.
Observe the di erent grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements. Consult a quali ed electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions.
It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station due to
174 Driving and parking
the improved charging performance and better charging e ciency o ered.
Stowing the charging cable Always stow the vehicle charging cable in the charging cable bag provided and secure it in the boot or load compartment of your vehicle. Otherwise, the charging cable is not su ciently secured.
System limits The power output of the high-voltage battery may be impaired by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle
being switched on, e.g. operating the air conditioning system R Extended periods without charging
The charging time of the high-voltage battery may be increased by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Extended periods without charging
R The maximum available charge current of the charging facility
R The settings of the charging process in the multimedia system (/ page 188)
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket (mode 2)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a
mains socket that: R Has been properly installed and R Has been inspected by a quali ed electri-
cian
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
# Purchase these parts at a MercedesBenz Service Centre and obtain advice there.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for highvoltage charging of your vehicle.
# Never use a damaged charging cable.
# Do not use:
R Extension cables
R Extension reels
R Multiple sockets
# Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle.
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter.
Only the following charging cables may be used:
R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
R A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle.
The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment.
Shorter charging times can be achieved in the following ways:
R Charging at a wallbox.
R Charging at a charging station.
When doing so, always observe the local information.
Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.
Do not li the controls by the following component parts:
R The charging cable connector.
R The mains plug.
When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise, the charging process may be cancelled.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example.
# Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that:
R Has been properly installed and
R Has been inspected by a quali ed electrician
# For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
# Never use damaged charging cables.
# Do not extend the charging cable.
# Do not use adapters.
Driving and parking 175
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the wallbox.
If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally available charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/ luggage compartment.
Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components
Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example.
# For charging stations with a preinstalled charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious faults, such as massive damage to the housing or charging cable.
176 Driving and parking
# For charging stations without a preinstalled charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
R Never use damaged charging cables.
R Do not extend the charging cable.
R Do not use adapters.
# Make sure to observe the safety information on the charging station.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is described as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when
charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a fast charging station (mode 4)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components
Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example.
# For charging stations with a preinstalled charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious faults, such as massive damage to the housing or charging cable.
# For charging stations without a preinstalled charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and
approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
R Never use damaged charging cables.
R Do not extend the charging cable.
R Do not use adapters.
# Make sure to observe the safety information on the charging station.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.
The charging cable for the vehicle must not be longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of signals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be
Driving and parking 177
higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is described as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Setting the maximum permissible charging current for charging at a mains socket
* NOTE Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current
If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat.
# Make sure that the external mains supply has been designed to handle the set charging current.
# If necessary, reduce the set charging current or use a di erent mains socket.
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts at a MercedesBenz Service Centre and obtain advice there.
# Check the setting of the maximum charge current using the charging capacity shown in the Instrument Display.
Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspected by a qualied electrician. The charging cable supplied is set to a country-speci c maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country. When abroad, observe the country-speci c laws when charging. If you have questions concerning setting the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Set the maximum permissible charging current in the multimedia system menu (/ page 188).
If the exact value of the maximum permissible charging current cannot be set, select the next smaller adjustable value. % If the vehicle requires more time than usual to
charge the high-voltage battery, check the maximum charging current settings in the multimedia system menu.
Overview of the charging cable control panel
The charging cable control panel shows the current status of the charging process.
178 Driving and parking
1 Supply voltage indicator 2 Charging process indicator 3 Temperature monitor indicator 4 Safety system indicator
Supply voltage indicator 1
Display
Meaning
Lights up white
The supply voltage is connected.
Charging process indicator 2
Display
Meaning
Flashes green
The high-voltage battery is charging.
Temperature control indicator 3
Display
Meaning
Lights up red
The green LED ashes simultaneously: overtemperature the charging performance is reduced.
The green LED does not ash: overtemperature the charging process is stopped.
Flashes red
Overtemperature at the mains plug the charging process is stopped.
Safety system indicator 4
Display
Meaning
Flashes red
Charging cable malfunction cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.
Lights up red
White LED is o : power supply malfunction cannot carry out the charging process, replace the mains socket.
White LED is on: vehicle malfunction cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.
When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test.
If temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight.
To reset the charging cable operating unit: if safety system 4 indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately ve seconds. If the malfunction persists a er the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a quali ed specialist workshop, depending on the indicator.
Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehicle socket
% Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.
The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.
Combo 1 vehicle socket 1 Socket lamp 2 Charging process indicator lamp 3 Locking status indicator lamp
Driving and parking 179
Combo 2 vehicle socket 1 Socket lamp 2 Charging process indicator lamp 3 Locking status indicator lamp Socket lamp 1 ashes or lights up as with indicator lamps 2 and 3.
180 Driving and parking
Overview of the locking status
Locking sta- Display tus 3
Meaning
%
Lights up white
Vehicle socket unlocked, insert or remove charging cable
%
Flashes white Malfunction during locking or unlocking
Overview of the charging process status
Status of the charging process 2
Display
Meaning
#
Flashes orange
Connection is being established
#
Flashes green Active energy ow
Status of the charging process 2 #
#
Display
Lights up orange Lights up green
#
Flashes red (for approx. 90 s)
Meaning
Interruption in charging
Charging process completed
Vehicle malfunction; charging is not possible
Starting the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)
& DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.
# Only use an undamaged charging cable.
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.
* NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable connector
During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values.
The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors:
R the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
R the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
# If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again.
Driving and parking 181
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements: R The transmission is in position j.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The vehicle has not been started.
R The charging cable is not taut.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.
Combo 1 vehicle socket
182 Driving and parking
Combo 2 vehicle socket # Press the centre rear section of socket ap
1 and swing the socket ap forwards and open. The % indicator lamp 2 and status display 3 light up white.
% When the vehicle is started (the õ display is lit in the Instrument Display), socket ap 1 cannot be opened.
# Press catch 7 to the le and fold open socket cover 5.
% Only connection 8 is required for the charging cable connector. Open only the upper part of socket cover 5.
# To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source to the stop and set the maximum charging current if required (/ page 177).
# Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket connection 8 to the stop. If the wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.
The # indicator lamp 4 and status display 3 ash orange and, as soon as the highvoltage battery is charged, green.
% When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with the # indicator lamp 4 (/ page 142).
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the Instrument Display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction either refers to the predicted charge level at the set departure time, or the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.
% When the vehicle is switched on, a lightning symbol appears next to the charge level display during the charging process.
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
Combo 1 vehicle socket
Ending the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)
Requirements: R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
Driving and parking 183
# Press and hold button 2 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 171).
# Press charging interruption button 3.
or
# Unlock the vehicle. The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
184 Driving and parking
Combo 2 vehicle socket
# Press charging interruption button 2. or # Unlock the vehicle.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. A er the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle socket will be locked again.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 171).
% A er the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the % indicator lamp 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching o .
Starting the direct current charging process (mode 4)
& DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.
# Only use an undamaged charging cable.
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.
* NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable connector
During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values.
The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors:
R the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
R the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
# If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no
charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements: R The transmission is in position j.
Driving and parking 185
R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The vehicle has not been started. R The charging cable is not taut.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.
186 Driving and parking Combo 1 vehicle socket
Combo 2 vehicle socket
# Press the centre rear section of socket ap 1 and swing the socket ap forwards and open. The % indicator lamp 2 and status display 3 light up white.
% When the vehicle is started (the õ display is lit in the Instrument Display), socket ap 1 cannot be opened.
# Press catch 7 to the le and fold open socket cover 5.
% The CCS charging cable connector requires connections 6 and 8. Therefore, it is necessary to open both parts of socket cover 5.
# Insert the CCS charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.
The # indicator lamp 4 and status display 3 ash orange and, as soon as the highvoltage battery is charged, green.
% When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with the # indicator lamp 4 (/ page 142).
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the Instrument Display
with a charging prediction. The charging prediction either refers to the predicted charge level at the set departure time, or the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.
% When the ignition is switched on, a lightning symbol appears next to the charge level display during the charging process.
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
Combo 1 vehicle socket
Driving and parking 187
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
Combo 2 vehicle socket
Ending the direct current charging process (mode 4)
Requirements: R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
# Press charging interruption button 3. The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
# Press and hold button 2 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
188 Driving and parking
# Press charging interruption button 2. The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
% A er the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the le % indicator lamp 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching o .
Function of the charge level display in the Instrument Display
1 Current charge level 2 Time at which completely charged 3 Predicted charge level at pre-selected depar-
ture time 4 Current charging capacity When the vehicle is connected to the mains supply and is switched o , the Instrument Display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes. The value for current charging capacity 4 may di er from the display on the charging station. At
a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the value in the charge level display is rounded o and shown without a decimal place.
% The value in item 3 varies depending on the setting of the charging process. It displays the charging prediction, e.g. the time at which the selected charge level will be reached or the charge level at the pre-selected departure time.
Con guring the charging settings
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ 5 Charging options
Setting the departure time The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. The charging process always starts immediately, irrespective of the next departure time.
# Select Departure time.
The following charging times can be selected: R Off (no departure time) R Once (XX) R Week profile
# Select a setting.
Setting a single departure time # Select Departure time. # Select Once (XX). # Select Z. # Set a departure time.
Setting the week pro le # Select Departure time. # Select Week profile. # Select Z. # Add new time # Set the desired departure times, e.g. every
day at 8 a.m. # Select a.
Driving and parking 189
Searching for charging stations
# Select Search for charging stations.
# Enter the search term and select Charging station.
Setting the maximum charging current
# Select Home, Work or Standard.
# Select Maximum charge current.
# Select Maximum, 8 amps or 6 amps. When the high-voltage battery is charged, the charging current is limited to the selected amperage.
% The value of the maximum charging current depends on the xed value charging cable which was provided.
% For charging at a household socket only use a charging cable belonging to the vehicle or a comparable cable, which conforms to DIN IEC 62752 and does not exceed a maximum charging current of 8 amps.
Setting the maximum charge level
# Select Home, Work or Standard.
# Select Maximum charge state.
# Set the desired percentage. The high-voltage battery is charged up to the set percentage as a maximum.
% The percentage can be set in increments of 10%. A maximum charge level of 80% is recommended. Higher maximum charge levels can diminish the longevity of the high-voltage battery (/ page 171).
% As soon as the full charge level is reached, a noti cation is shown in the media display that the charging process is completed and the journey may be continued.
Unlocking the charging cable (mode 2, 3 or 4) When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maximum charge level is reached.
# Select Home or Work.
# Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
Activating or deactivating location-based charging If the function is active and pertinent addresses have been stored in the navigation destinations,
190 Driving and parking
the corresponding charging program is automatically selected as soon as the address is reached and parking position P is engaged. # Select Home or Work. # Activate or deactivate Select based on loca-
tion.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insu ciently secured vehicle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked su ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving. # apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to position j.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:
R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.
% If you park the vehicle for a long period, observe the following notes:
R Make sure the high-voltage battery has a su cient state of charge, especially at very low outside temperatures. In this way you can avoid any problems when the vehicle is subsequently started.
R If possible, avoid parking spaces in direct sunlight.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 171).
# Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 170).
# Switch o the vehicle by pressing the 1 button.
# Release the service brake slowly.
# Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement.
Driving and parking 191
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement.
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started.
% The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.
192 Driving and parking
# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp ashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow.
# Point remote control 5 from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is complete.
R Indicator lamp 4 ashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.
% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronising the rolling code
Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code.
R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.
R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
# Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Driving and parking 193
# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends.
# Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control.
% It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even a er you have successfully performed the measures described above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline.
% Support and additional information on programming:
R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277
R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com
Opening or closing the garage door
Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow a er approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
# If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake
Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
194 Driving and parking
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle is switched o .
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 195).
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be ful lled:
- The vehicle is switched o .
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
- There is a system malfunction.
- The power supply is insu cient.
- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are ful lled: R The driver's door is closed.
R The vehicle has been started.
R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi
from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground.
R If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate must be closed.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be ful lled:
- You shi from transmission position j.
or
- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.
When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying
# Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Driving and parking 195
% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit continuously.
Releasing
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Pull handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red ! indicator lamp ashes.
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will
receive a noti cation in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on.
You will receive information about the following points:
R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
R The force of the impact.
The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation:
R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a two-storey garage.
% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated.
System limits
Detection may be restricted in the following situations:
R the vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the paint is damaged by a key
R an impact occurs at low speed
196 Driving and parking
R the electric parking brake is not applied
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or tra c conditions.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors 3 Front radar
4 Front camera 5 Corner radars 6 Ultrasonic sensors 7 Reversing camera
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 309). The sensors and cameras must
Driving and parking 197
not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range.
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 198)
R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 198)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 198)
R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 199)
R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 200)
R STEER CONTROL (/ page 200)
R HOLD function (/ page 200)
R Hill Start Assist (/ page 202)
R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 202)
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 202)
R Cruise control (/ page 204)
R Limiter (/ page 205)
R Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 222)
R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 221)
Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 207)
R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 211)
R Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 212)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 216)
R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 213)
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 215)
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 224)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 227)
Parking Package R Reversing camera (/ page 230)
R 360° Camera (/ page 232)
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 235)
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 239)
198 Driving and parking
Functions of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:
R During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insu cient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h.
R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously a er the vehicle is started.
Function of BAS
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in
emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ESP®
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery carriage-
ways. R When braking.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The drive output is adapted according to the
situation.
Driving and parking 199
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.
Observe the following points when ESP® is deactivated:
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R The drive wheels could spin.
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes in the instrument cluster, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:
R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
R When using snow chains.
R In deep snow.
R On sand or gravel.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information:
R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 407)
R Display messages (/ page 358)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:
R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
In uence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 168).
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above approx. 80 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.
200 Driving and parking
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
% ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
# Select ESP.
# Select On or å Off.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.
Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Function of EBD
Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, espe-
cially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering recommendation is given in the following situations: R both right wheels or both le wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid
System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated.
R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.
HOLD function
HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a su cient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in
the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released.
Driving and parking 201
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
R The transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function
# Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the Instrument Display.
# Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
disappears from the Instrument Display.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
R The transmission is shi ed to position j.
R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake:
R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
R The vehicle is switched o .
R There is a system malfunction.
R The power supply is insu cient.
Function of the intelligent crawler mode
The intelligent crawler mode assists you when pulling away, manoeuvring and parking on uphill or downhill inclines. When the brake pedal is released, the vehicle rolls in the direction of the engaged transmission position. The crawler torque is adapted to the uphill incline.
In recuperation level hà (/ page 165) the intelligent crawler mode also assists you up to speeds of approximately 20 km/h, by following the vehicle in front at approximately the same speed.
202 Driving and parking
The intelligent crawler mode is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su cient distance to the vehicle in front.
System limits The intelligent crawler mode does not automatically stop the vehicle if the vehicle in front stops. Bring the vehicle to a standstill using the brake pedal.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swi ly move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following tra c in an emergency braking situation with the following actions: R By ashing the brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This provides tra c travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake application, the hazard warning lights switch on once the
vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch o automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detec-
Driving and parking 203
ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes.
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break.
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:
- the fuller the circle, the higher the attention level determined
- as your attention wanes, the circle in the centre of the display becomes smaller
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.
If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system o ers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. A er the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.
Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:
R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
R If there is a strong side wind.
R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 213).
R If the time has been set incorrectly.
R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:
R You switch o the vehicle.
R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).
204 Driving and parking
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist
Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest rest area. # Activate or deactivate the function.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.
Cruise control and limiter
Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed.
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. In drive program ;, the adjustable speed is limited to 130 km/h.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
Displays in the Instrument Display R h (grey): cruise control is selected but not
yet activated.
R h (green): cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears along with the h display.
% The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer.
System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Increase recuperation in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the electric motor's braking e ect to charge the high-voltage battery. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situations:
R in tra c situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on winding roads
R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
R when visibility is poor
Function of the limiter The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.
You can limit the speed as follows:
R Variable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas
R Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
Displays in the Instrument Display R È (grey): variable limiter is selected but not
yet activated.
R È ( ashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive.
R È (green): variable limiter is activated.
A stored speed appears along with the È display. The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the Instrument Display and the È display ashes.
The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations:
R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.
R If the stored speed is called up.
R If you store a new speed.
Operating cruise control or the variable limiter
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.
Driving and parking 205
# Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements: Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h. Variable limiter R The variable limiter is selected.
206 Driving and parking
# To operate cruise control or the variable limiter: press the rocker switch on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter # To select cruise control: select h with the
right rocker switch.
# To select the variable limiter: select È with the right rocker switch.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a di erent button (/ page 209).
Activating cruise control or the variable limiter
# Press rocker switch 1 up M or down N. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).
or
# Select J with the le rocker switch. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).
If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
% When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
# 1 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h).
or
# 10 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).
or
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M.
Adopting a detected speed
# Activate cruise control or the variable limiter.
# If a tra c sign has been detected and is displayed in the instrument cluster: select J with the le rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter
# Select O with the le rocker switch.
Driving and parking 207
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.
Information on the permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a speci c speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter.
You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system (/ page 207).
If you limit the speed to a value above the vehicle's maximum speed which can be driven or maximum design speed, the permanent limiter has no e ect.
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the Instrument Display. When you conrm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch o the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.
The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.
Setting the limit speed for winter tyres Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyres limit
# Select a speed or deactivate the function.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed (from 20 km/h) and the distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering wheel.
The adjustable set speed can vary due to the following factors:
R Drive program selected ; (/ page 167)
R Stored limit speed (e.g. winter tyre limit) (/ page 207)
Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic) (/ page 167)
R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)
- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multilane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving o , a visual and acoustic
208 Driving and parking warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the Instrument Display
Assistance graphic 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event (/ page 212) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set speci ed distance
Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected, speci ed distance set
R k (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected
R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected
R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 212).
The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out.
% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive
mode. The ç suspended message appears in the Instrument Display.
Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The Instrument Display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the tra c conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not su cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.
Driving and parking 209
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a di erent lane or when
changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex tra c conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the tra c conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
210 Driving and parking
R The transmission is in position h. R The driver's door is closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used
to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.
# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter
# Press the I button.
Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N, or select J with the le rocker switch.
or
# To activate with a stored speed: select J with the le rocker switch.
# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.
Adopting a detected speed limit
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
# If a tra c sign has been detected and is displayed in the instrument cluster: select J with the le rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the tra c sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal.
# Select J with the le rocker switch.
or
# Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and rmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Driving and parking 211
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
# Select O with the le rocker switch.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
# 1 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h).
or
# 10 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).
or
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M.
Changing the speci ed distance to the vehicle in front
# To reduce the speci ed distance: press the right rocker switch up (Ñ).
# To increase the speci ed distance: press the right rocker switch down (Ò).
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 224).
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display
in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign.
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
System limits The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to the detection of tra c signs (/ page 222).
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly
212 Driving and parking
detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system.
Adjust the speed in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:
R at speed limits below 20 km/h
R in wet conditions or in fog
R when towing a trailer
# Ensure that the driven speed complies with tra c regulations.
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current tra c and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive
program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.
You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 213).
The following route events are taken into account:
R Bends
R T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations
R Turns and exits
R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c Information )
% When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:
R Turning o at junctions
R Driving on slowing-down lanes
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.
When route guidance is active, the rst speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con rmed and further speed adjustment is activated.
Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases:
R If the turn signal indicator is switched o before the route event.
R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.
System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is
Driving and parking 213
responsible for complying with road tra c regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations:
R the road's course not clearly visible
R road narrowing
R varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example at toll stations
R wet road surfaces, snow or ice
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:
R If the driver does not follow the calculated route
R If map data is not up-to-date or available
R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
# Adapt the speed to the tra c situation.
Setting route-based speed adaptation
Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted. R ECO Assist is active.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based speed adapt.
# Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.
% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 212).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.
% Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.
Status display of Active Steering Assist in the Instrument Display R Ø (grey): activated and passive
R Ø (green): activated and active
R Ø (red): system limits detected
214 Driving and parking
R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt
% During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and ashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as grey in the Instrument Display.
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.
If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 215).
The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives con rmation to the system:
R The driver steers the vehicle.
R Depending on the country: the driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not su cient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R Insu cient road illumination.
R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or junctions.
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
R The road is narrow and winding.
R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:
R On tight bends and when turning.
R When crossing junctions.
R At roundabouts or toll stations.
R When the tyre pressure is too low.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the tra c carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention
to tra c conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to tra c conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist
Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
Driving and parking 215 R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select a Act. Steer. Asst. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning
216 Driving and parking
tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.
If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning emergency stop message appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.
Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically.
When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:
R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended.
R The vehicle is unlocked.
R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:
R Steering
R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Brake Assist
Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Eva-
sive Steering Assist and cornering function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display and then automatically goes out a er a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situation-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex tra c situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
R Give a warning or brake without reason
R Not give a warning or not brake
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges:
The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations:
R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insu cient for the
Driving and parking 217
driven speed, the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the tra c situation allows this.
Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
218 Driving and parking
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, moving pedestrians, and cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing cyclists
Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists
R at speeds up to approximately 50 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)
The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists
Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:
R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown
R releasing the brake pedal
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is ful lled:
R you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle
R there is no longer a risk of collision
R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:
R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians.
R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre.
R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
R Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.
Driving and parking 219
You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.
Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 15 km/h before you have le the lane in which you are driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex tra c situations clearly.
Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to avoid a collision.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
220 Driving and parking
# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.
System limits Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds a er switching on the vehicle or a er driving o .
If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp appears in the Instrument Display.
The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ections in multi-storey car parks.
R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.
R In complex tra c situations where objects cannot always be clearly identi ed.
R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background.
R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.
R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
R On bends with a tight radius.
% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process.
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist
# Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist
% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.
# Select Off. The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated.
When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the Instrument Display.
Driving and parking 221
Speed Limit Assist
Function of Speed Limit Assist
% Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data, which is made available under the conditions of the Open Database License (OBbL). Further information can be found at: https:// www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.
Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with a multifunction camera and displays them in the instrument cluster and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet) as well as stop signs.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can
specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Display in the Instrument Display % The illustrations show the Instrument Display
in the widescreen cockpit.
1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction (e.g. when wet) If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Speed Limit Assist is not supported. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered.
222 Driving and parking
R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs outside the camera's eld of vision.
Setting Speed Limit Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
Adjusting the type of warning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.
Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed. % If one of the following systems is activated,
the speed detected can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter
Further information (/ page 209).
Tra c Sign Assist
Function of Tra c Sign Assist Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 196). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the Instrument Display.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
Since Tra c Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting tra c signs.
If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning.
The camera also detects tra c signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restriction applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies.
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Driving and parking 223
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a
restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction (e.g. when wet) % Vehicles with a standard Instrument Display: a
+ symbol next to a tra c sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional tra c signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the head-up display.
If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported. Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes-
sages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 358).
Warning when approaching pedestrian crossings (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The ¯ Watch for pedestrians message appears in the instrument cluster. The warning occurs only if appropriate tra c signs or lane markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered.
R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs outside the camera's eld of vision.
224 Driving and parking
Setting Tra c Sign Assist
Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
# Select Adopt limit.
# Switch the function on or o . The speed limits detected by Tra c Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Cruise control
R Variable limiter
Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 209).
Displaying detected tra c signs in the media display # Select Display in head unit. # Switch the function on or o .
Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off.
Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor
the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.
Permanent status display in the instrument cluster:
R ¸ (grey): system is activated but inoperative
R ¸ (green): system is activated and operational
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the ashing of the red warning lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
Driving and parking 225
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 196).
Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed.
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.
# Always pay particular attention to the tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clearance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to ash.
This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes a er switching the vehicle o . The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three times.
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.
System limits
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is su cient distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles.
226 Driving and parking
Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.
The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:
R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
R when people approach the vehicle
R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects
Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your-
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display
1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers (/ page 224).
Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:
R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
R You brake or accelerate signi cantly.
R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated.
Driving and parking 227
R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
# Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
or
# Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 196). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer:
R Ã (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating.
R Ã (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating.
R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display.
The system does not apply the brake if you activate the turn signal indicator.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator.
You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances:
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
228 Driving and parking
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations (/ page 229).
% The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in the following situations: Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.
Standard setting
R A lane marking and the edge of a rm road surface were detected. The front wheel drives over a lane marking on the edge of the rm road surface.
R A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were detected. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
Sensitive setting
R All situations described under the Standard setting.
R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations (/ page 229).
% The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in all situations described under Sensitive.
Standard setting
R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent
lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
Sensitive setting
R The situations described under the Standard setting.
R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
System limits
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations:
R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
R When ESP® is deactivated.
Driving and parking 229
R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected and displayed.
If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place (/ page 229).
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the sun or re ections.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch o , cross one another or merge.
R If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent
on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.
Activate or deactivate the function.
Function of adaptive damping adjustment
Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is set individually for each wheel and is a ected by the following factors: R the road surface conditions R vehicle load
230 Driving and parking
R the drive program selected
R the driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Reversing camera
Function of the reversing camera If you have activated the function in the multimedia system (/ page 235), the image from the reversing camera is displayed in the media display when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing.
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
% You can open the cover of the reversing camera manually (/ page 235).
The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views:
R Normal view
R Wide-angle view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view
1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear area
3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Bumper
5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
Driving and parking 231
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 0.3 m or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium distance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)
Wide-angle view
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view
1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
Wide-angle view
System failure If the reversing camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia system.
232 Driving and parking
System limits
The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:
R The tailgate is open.
R There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are tted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 196).
% Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example.
The views of the 360° Camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 16 km/h and when reversing.
The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Reversing camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors % You can open the cover of the reversing cam-
era manually (/ page 235). Views of the 360° Camera You can select from di erent views:
1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera
3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors
4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam-
era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch) Top view
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle
2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
3 Your vehicle from above
The colour of the individual segments of warning display 2 is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:
R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m
R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m
R Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey.
Guide lines
Driving and parking 233
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes 1 are displayed in green.
234 Driving and parking The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level.
Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out
2 Marker of the wheel contact points System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the following message appears in the media display:
System limits
The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:
R The doors are open.
R The outside mirrors are folded in.
R The tailgate is open.
R There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are tted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 196).
% Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 309).
Calling up the view of the 360° Camera using reverse gear
Requirements: R The Auto reversing camera function is activa-
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 235).
# Engage reverse gear.
# Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 232).
# If, a er shi ing to reverse gear, the image of the reversing camera is not shown: switch o
Driving and parking 235
the vehicle, press and hold the c button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again.
Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/o The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
# Switch Auto reversing camera on or o .
Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
# Select Open camera cover.
% The camera cover closes automatically a er some time or a er an ignition cycle.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using multiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately 1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately
0.2 m. Using the Warn early all-round setting in the multimedia system, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater distance of approximately 1.0 m in front and 0.6 m on the sides (/ page 239). % The Warn early all-round setting is always
active in the rear of the vehicle. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system
Vehicles without 360° Camera
236 Driving and parking
R Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less
Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the head-up display
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (/ page 196).
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Vehicles with 360° Camera
If you have not selected the Camera & parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 10 km/h.
The colour of the individual segments of the warning display is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:
R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m
R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.6 m on the sides 3 can also be displayed in the head-up display.
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects.
Example: vehicles with 360° Camera
When rear segments 1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the é symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to
Driving and parking 237
signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a di erent location.
If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes:
R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 309).
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protection Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detection range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must rst detect the object while you are driving past it.
During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in colour in the display.
The segment colour changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:
R Yellow: approximately 30 - 60 cm
R Red: less than approximately 30 cm
In order for lateral, front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a distance of at least half a vehicle's length. Once the vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be displayed.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a 360° Camera
1 Operational front and rear
2 Operational front, rear and sides
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow) and rear (red)
238 Driving and parking
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a 360° Camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red) Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . R You open the doors. A er the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.
System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact protection.
The following objects are not detected, for example:
R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side
R Objects placed next to the vehicle
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.
# When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.
Requirements: R The camera menu is open.
R Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.
# Tap = on the media display.
If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.
Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.
Driving and parking 239
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning tone volume.
# Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning tone pitch.
# Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn early all-round.
# Switch the function on or o .
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone.
# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.
# Switch the function on or o .
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist o ers the following functions:
R Country-dependent: parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist
As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in the Instrument Display.
When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the Instrument Display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display.
The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired.
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle.
When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
240 Driving and parking
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations:
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
R You begin steering.
R You apply the parking brake.
R You engage transmission position j.
R ESP® intervenes.
R You open the doors or the tailgate while driving.
System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.
Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
There is a danger of collision!
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identi ed as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:
R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%.
R When snow chains are tted.
R Directly a er a tyre change or when spare tyres are tted.
R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er bottoming out on a kerb.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as:
R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Parking with Active Parking Assist # Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.
% Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path.
# If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
# Select desired parking space 4 and con rm.
# If necessary, select the parking direction (forwards or reverse), and con rm. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and the parking direction.
Driving and parking 241
% The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the media display:
242 Driving and parking
select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Ø Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle display message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary.
# A er completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking procedure.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active Park-
ing Assist.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.
# Start the vehicle.
# Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.
# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3 Left or Right.
% The vehicle path shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path.
# Con rm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space.
% The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins.
Driving and parking 243
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched o automatically.
A er the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Ø Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle.
The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.
Manoeuvring assistant
Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is brie y reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display.
Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 244).
% You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 238).
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and tra c situations.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the tra c situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani-
244 Driving and parking
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, for example:
R If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged.
R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:
R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
R If you shi the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is stationary.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.
R If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system.
System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines.
% Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 235).
Function of Cross Tra c Alert
% Cross Tra c Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
Cross Tra c Alert can warn drivers of any crossing tra c when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.
Cross Tra c Alert is active under the following conditions:
R if the vehicle is reversing at a walking pace.
R manoeuvring assistance is activated (/ page 244).
% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 224).
System limits Cross Tra c Alert is not available on inclines.
Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistant Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
# Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance.
% Manoeuvring assistant must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 243) and Cross Tra c Alert (/ page 244).
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for at towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.
Observe the following information:
R Permitted towing methods (/ page 324)
R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 325)
Driving and parking 245
246 Instrument display and on-board computer
Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer
& WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails
If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at
a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from speci c systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Information about the range
R The actual range achieved may di er from the range displayed. The calculation of the range takes your previous driving style into account.
R When the trip computer is reset, the data on the previous driving style will also be deleted and calculated afresh from this point on.
R Factors such as outside temperature or climate control settings have a direct in uence on the achievable range.
R While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional information about the route ahead can be included in the range calculation.
Electrical consumption
R The consumption gures From start and From reset take into account all active consumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's operational readiness õ.
Instrument display and on-board computer 247
Overview of instrument display
1 Recommended speed when route guidance is active (drive program ; Eco)
2 Le area for additional values (example: digital speedometer): Digital speedometer / Range / ECO display
3 Outside temperature 4 Time 5 Right area for additional values (example:
operating energy in percent): Operating energy in percent / Range / ECO display 6 Output scale 7 Recuperated power scale 8 Maximum available output of the drive system 9 Transmission position A Current output B Index points
C Centre display area of the instrument display (example: standard display for trip): Trip / Service / Assistance / Telephone / Media / Radio / Navigation / Styles and displays
D Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
E Available maximum range according to average consumption
F Available range according to personal driving style
Under normal operating conditions, the display of the available drive system output is in the maximum range.
In the following cases, the power output available may deviate from the maximum range:
R Very high or low outside temperatures
R Very high performance requirements for a long period of time
R Very low charge status of the high-voltage battery
R Fault in the drive system
The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/ limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Maximum range E is calculated based on the average consumption of the vehicle. Range F is calculated based on the personal driving style.
The actual remaining range particularly depends on outside temperatures or air conditioning settings.
While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional information about the route ahead can be included in range calculation F. The actual remaining range may di er from the displayed currently calculated range.
248 Instrument display and on-board computer Overview of buttons on the steering wheel
1 P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer
2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 252)
£ LINGUATRONIC 5 ò To call up the home screen of the multi-
media system 6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in the
Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior
Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.
When the on-board computer is being operated, di erent acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list.
The following menus are available:
R Assistance
R Telephone
R Navigation
R Trip
R Radio
R Media
R Styles & display
R Service
% You can nd information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual.
The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display.
# To call up the menu bar: press the le -hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
# To scroll on the menu bar: swipe le or right on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or con rm a selection or setting: press the le -hand Touch Control.
# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a function, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To exit a submenu: press the le -hand back button.
Selecting the head-up display
# To switch on the head-up display: switch on the head-up display via the multimedia system or activate it on the menu bar by swiping upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. The head-up display menu will be selected on the head-up display.
# To switch to the head-up display: press the le -hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To set the three display ranges of the head-up display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
Full-screen menus Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the following menus can be shown full-screen on the instrument display:
R Assistance
R Trip
R Navigation
# On the corresponding menu, use the le -hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen.
Instrument display and on-board computer 249
Overview of displays on the instrument display Displays on the instrument display: u Active Parking Assist (/ page 241) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated h Cruise control (/ page 204) È Limiter (/ page 205) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 207) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 220) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 213) Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 227) ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist õ Operational readiness of the drive system
(/ page 160) ò Sound generator inoperative (/ page 367) ë HOLD function (/ page 200) ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for
certain countries only)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 221).
250 Instrument display and on-board computer
Vehicles with Tra c Sign Assist: detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 222).
Head-up display Function of the head-up display
The head-up display projects the following information into the driver's eld of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and driv-
ing safety systems R Some warning messages
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent content can be shown in the three areas of the head-up display (/ page 250).
Display content
1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and tra c signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise
control) System limits The visibility of the displays will be a ected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Light conditions
R Wet road surface R Objects on the display cover R Polarisation in sunglasses
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the head-up display.
Setting the head-up display using the on-board computer
On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following head-up display settings or displays can be selected or shown: R Position R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R LINGUATRONIC
Instrument display and on-board computer 251
# To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the le -hand Touch Control. The Settings menu 5 will be selected.
# To call up the Settings menu: press the le hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the le or right on the le -hand Touch Control.
Setting messages, assistance status, telephone, audio and LINGUATRONIC
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed.
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the le -hand Touch Control.
Selecting what the head-up display shows
(Example) 1 Switching the head-up display on/o 2 Le display area
Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning
4 Right display area Tra c Sign Assist Assistant display
5 Con guring settings 6 Index points
Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will
be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated.
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
Switching the head-up display on/o via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
# Select HUD. The head-up-display is activated.
252 MBUX multimedia system
Overview and operation
Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may di er from the description and
images in this Owner's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
2 Media display with touch functionality
3 Touchpad 4 Controller
Turn: adjusts the volume Press brie y: switches the mute function on/o Press and hold: switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or o 5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone 6 Button for favourites/themes
Further operating options:
R Conducting a voice dialogue with LINGUATRONIC.
R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant.
% You can nd further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Anti-the protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against the . More detailed informa-
tion about anti-the protection can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Home screen overview
MBUX multimedia system 253
1 Depending on the display, calls up the rst three applications or the home screen
2 Calls up the pro le
3 Calls up the global search
4 SOS NOT READY (only when the MercedesBenz emergency call system is not available)
5 Mercedes me connect active
6 Transmission of vehicle position active
7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time
8 Calls up the Noti cations Centre
9 Calls up an application using the symbol
254 MBUX multimedia system
A Application and current information
B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address
C Index points and selected display area
D Calls up the air conditioning menu
E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVOURITES
% If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the backend system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is countrydependent. If transmission of vehicle position 6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent.
Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control
1 © Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3 G Press brie y: returns to the previous
display 4 ß Press the rocker switch down brie y:
shows favourites
ß Press the rocker switch down and hold: adds favourites and themes ° Turn controller: adjusts the volume 8 Press controller: switches o the sound 6 Press the rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call ~ Press the rocker switch down: rejects or ends a call
Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single- nger swipes.
# To select a menu option: swipe and press.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
Using the touchscreen
# Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing brie y.
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, le or right.
# To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one nger on the touchscreen.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two ngers together or apart.
# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.
% For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.
Using the touchpad
MBUX multimedia system 255
# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To use handwriting recognition: write a char-
acter on the touchpad. # To open or close the Noti cations Centre:
swipe down or up with two ngers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two n-
gers together or apart.
Calling up applications using buttons
1 G Returns to the previous display 2 ~ Calls up the audio control menu
Swiping to the le of right: selects the previous or next radio station/music track 3 © Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad
1 y Calls up vehicle functions 2 z Calls up navigation 3 | Calls up radio or media 4 % Calls up the telephone
256 MBUX multimedia system
5 ß Press brie y: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or theme
# Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. # Call up the application (/ page 253).
Functions of LINGUATRONIC
& WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:
R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed.
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.
With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds a er the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
The following multimedia system applications can be operated:
R Telephone
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation
R Address book R Radio R Media R Vehicle functions Starting LINGUATRONIC
# Press rocker switch 1 up.
or # Say "Hello Mercedes".
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
& WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation
This product uses a classi cation 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and
repairs carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop.
This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014 and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.
MBUX multimedia system 257
The camera is located in the overhead control panel.
If the vehicle is tted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can di erentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects speci c hand positions (poses).
System limits, display messages and notes for recti cation
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch o temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures.
Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again.
R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched.
Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens.
Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro bre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.
R Recognition can be impaired by re ective clothing, an adverse colour of clothing or by accessories, for example.
R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera.
Keep the camera's eld of vision clear.
R The camera is not operational.
Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
258 MBUX multimedia system
The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:
Interaction area In front of the media display or above the touchpad
Above the centre console Below the inside rearview mirror Above the front passenger seat
Interaction
Description
Proximity to the control element
The Interior Assistant recognises the approach of the hand towards a control element.
Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions di erentiate between driver and front passenger.
No speci c hand position is required.
De ned pose
A favourite is called up with a de ned pose.
Brief up and down movements
With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and o .
Stretching out a hand above the front By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is
passenger seat
switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is
switched o again.
Switching the reading light and search light and on or o
Requirements: R For the reading light:
- The function is available when it is dark.
- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror.
R For the search light:
- The function is available when it is dark.
- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat.
- The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.
Switching the reading light on and o
# Brie y move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or o for the driver or the front passenger.
Switching the search light on and o
# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.
# To switch o : take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched o again.
Information on pro les, themes, suggestions and favourites For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes.
MBUX multimedia system 259
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le
Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.
# Make sure that when the position of the driver's seat is being adjusted via the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately:
# a) Tap the warning message on the media display.
or
# b) Press a memory function position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.
260 MBUX multimedia system
The driver's seat is equipped with an access preventer.
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le.
Pro les store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own pro le without changing the stored pro le settings of other drivers.
% Information on pro les from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.
For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example.
The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then o ers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a pro le, your consent to the recording of data and su cient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used o en. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an application.
Con guring pro les, themes and suggestions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles
Creating a new pro le # Select W Create profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and con rm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current settings. # Select Save.
# Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user pro le .
# Select Finished.
Selecting pro le options
# Select Ä for a pro le.
The following functions are available:
R Editing, resetting or deleting a pro le
R Resetting themes or favourites
R Con guring suggestions
Con guring suggestions
# Select Ä for a pro le.
# Select Suggestions settings.
# Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow music suggestions and Allow contact suggestions on or o .
# To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active pro le. Suggestions will continue to be shown.
Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calculated, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.
Creating new themes
# Select ©.
# Select THEMES.
# Select W Set theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.
# Select Continue r.
# Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and store the active settings in the theme.
# Select Continue r.
# Select an entry screen. # Select Continue r.
# Select an image.
# Enter the names into the entry eld and conrm with a.
# Select Save.
System settings Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements: R Display
- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness - Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements - Keyboard language and handwriting recog-
nition - Sensitivity of the touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R LINGUATRONIC R Sound - Entertainment - Navigation and tra c announcements
MBUX multimedia system 261
- Telephone - Voice ampli cation to the rear R Connectivity - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R So ware updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset
Information on important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update
262 MBUX multimedia system
R Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system
% If automatic so ware updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically.
The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available.
You have the following selection options:
R Accept and install
The system update will be downloaded in the background.
R Information
Information about the pending system update is displayed.
R Later
The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time.
Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched o .
If the download of a deep system update is completed and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this a er the next ignition cycle, for example.
% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation.
Requirements for the installation:
R The ignition is switched o .
R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted.
R The electric parking brake is applied.
If all requirements have been ful lled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to resolve the problem.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multime-
dia system with external hotspots: your vehicle does not have a permanently installed communication module.
R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
# Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.
MBUX multimedia system 263
% The connection procedure may di er depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
# Select Internet settings.
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select Add hotspot.
Connecting using a QR code # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using QR code.
# Scan the displayed QR code with the device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using security key.
# Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Enter this security key on the multimedia system.
# Con rm the entry with ¡.
Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN.
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
# Con rm the entry.
Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect via WPS PBC.
# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.
# Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network.
# Activate Permanent Internet connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi network
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again.
Con guring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.
# Select Vehicle hotspot.
264 MBUX multimedia system
# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect using WPS PIN generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and con rm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect using WPS PIN input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be
connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key # Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
A security key is displayed.
# Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
# Con rm the entry.
Connecting using NFC
# Select Connect via NFC.
# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface.
# Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Generating a new security key
# Select Vehicle hotspot.
# Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.
# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.
System language
Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language a ects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language
# Set the language.
% If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)
& WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions
While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the reversing camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when
the vehicle is stationary.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset
Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones
MBUX multimedia system 265
R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection
R Individual user pro les
% The guest pro le is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings.
% Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.
A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset.
Drive system settings Calling up the energy ow display
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ
# Select Energy flow. The visualisation of the energy ow in the vehicle is displayed.
In addition to the energy ow, the current charge level of the high-voltage battery is also displayed. Functions of the energy ow display
1 State of charge of the high-voltage battery 2 Electric motors (drive system) 3 Energy ow 4 High-voltage battery The active components of the drive system are highlighted in the energy ow display. The energy ow between the individual components is shown in colour.
266 MBUX multimedia system
The energy ow is shown in di erent colours depending on the operating status: R White: strong acceleration (boost e ect) R Copper: driving at constant speed or with
moderate acceleration R Blue: recuperation (charging the high-voltage
battery) or overrun mode
Navigation Notes on navigation
Route guidance with augmented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c
situation. # Avoid extended observation of the cam-
era image.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information
The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c
situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation)
# Alternatively: press the z button. The map displays the current vehicle position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active.
# To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.
Navigation overview
MBUX multimedia system 267
Example: digital map with navigation menu
1 Enters a POI or address and additional destination entry options
2 Cancels active route guidance
3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or o
4 ON ROUTE menu with Route overview, Alternative routes and Report traffic incident (Car-to-X)
TRAFFIC menu with Traffic announcements, Area announcements and Live Traffic Subscription Info
Displays Route list
POSITION menu with Store position, Compass and Qibla
5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking, Range and Motorway information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced
268 MBUX multimedia system
Entering a destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?
1 Country in which the vehicle is located 2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry 5 a Con rms an entry
6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language
A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can
be made in any order.
The following entries can be made, for example: R Town, street, house number R Street, town R Postcode R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name
# Select a search result in list 3. # Calculate the route (/ page 269). % You can nd further information about desti-
nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Changing country # Select the country indicator in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country in 3.
Using online search % Requirements: the media display shows an
Internet connection in the status line with the Q symbol.
Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search nds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Enter the destination in input line 2.
The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator 1.
# Select the provider for the online service from the countries list.
# Enter the destination in input line 2.
# Select the destination in the list.
Calculating a route with Electric Intelligence and using settings for route guidance
Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.
MBUX multimedia system 269
R For navigation with Electric Intelligence:
- Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is connected with the account.
- The "Electric Intelligence Remote and Navigation Services" option is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The scope includes the "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" and "Display of charging stations" services.
- The Electric Intelligence route option is switched on.
270 MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped.
# Select ¥. The route with Electric Intelligence is automatically and intelligently calculated to the destination. This is updated during route guidance. The route with Electric Intelligence contains the required charging stations as intermediate destinations. The charging stations are determined taking account of the driving distance and the estimated charging times.
Route guidance begins.
or
# Select ¦. # Select Set as intermediate dest..
The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.
or
# Select Start new route guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. If required the multimedia system sets charging stations as intermediate destinations. Route guidance to the new destination begins.
Switching on the Electric Intelligence route option
# Select Z in the navigation menu.
# Select Advanced.
# Select Route.
# Activate Electric Intelligence.
Selecting route settings
# Select Z.
# Select Advanced.
# Select Route.
# Select the route type.
# Take tra c information into consideration with Dynamic route guidance r.
# Select route options with Avoid options.
# Activate Suggest alternative route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
# Activate Activate commuter route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality
# During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeuvre and will show additional information.
# To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.
Displaying additional information in the camera image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street names and House numbers.
During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.
Using map functions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one nger
on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two ngers on the
media display.
Moving the map # Move one nger in any direction on the
touchscreen.
# To reset the map to the current vehicle position: press \ brie y.
Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up.
Switching motorway information on/o # Select Z. # Switch Motorway information on or o .
Using services
Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service.
MBUX multimedia system 271
Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available and has been activated. R The following additional conditions apply to the Parking service: - The navigation services option is available,
subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. - The Parking service is within the scope of the Navigation Services.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Displaying the tra c situation with Live Tra c Information # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map elements.
272 MBUX multimedia system
# Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay. If tra c information has been received, then tra c incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed.
The tra c delay is displayed for the current route. Tra c delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents options.
# Set the options. If Traffic is switched o and Traffic incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.
Displaying weather information and other map contents
# Select Z.
# Select Advanced.
# Select View.
# Select Map elements.
# Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENTS category.
# Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.
Parking service
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.
# Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.
* NOTE Before selecting the parking option
The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the multi-storey car park/parking area. # Always observe the local Information and
conditions.
% This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z and activate Parking.
# Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option.
The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from current
vehicle position and arrival time
R Information on the multi-storey car park/car park, for example:
- Opening times
- Parking charges
- Current occupancy
- Maximum parking time
- Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances.
R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards)
R Details on parking tari s
R Number of available parking spaces
R Payment method (e.g. at the parking meter)
R Services/facilities at the parking option
R Telephone number
# Calculate the route (/ page 269).
Notes on the dashcam
* NOTE Before using the dashcam
You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in particular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-speci c regula-
tions.
Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam
Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the
multimedia system .
MBUX multimedia system 273
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions,
recorded video les are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.
Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam
Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime-
dia system . R The vehicle is switched on.
274 MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam
# If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 273).
# Select the Individual recording or Loop recording recording mode. If Individual recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops.
If Loop recording has been selected, several short video les are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video le is deleted and recording is continued automatically.
# To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video le is stored on the USB device.
# To end: select End recording.
A report may appear in the following cases:
R For the Individual recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video le.
R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National border crossed. Please observe the countryspecific regulations regarding video recording. message appears.
This function is not available in all countries.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the tra c situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
# As the driver, only operate mobile communications devices when the vehicle is stationary.
# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 118) Bluetooth® connection:
MBUX multimedia system 275
The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® pro le of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® pro les:
R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Pro le)
- The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit.
For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Network connection:
276 MBUX multimedia system
The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:
R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free.
R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® .
Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may uctuate.
Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Telephone menu overview
MBUX multimedia system 277
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
5 Options
6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.
278 MBUX multimedia system
R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode).
- You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the mobile phone in the foreground.
- You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background.
You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect new device.
Connecting a mobile phone Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing. # Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, con rm the code on the mobile phone.
Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:
- R Accept a call - k End call - i Create conferen. call - Accepting or rejecting a waiting call
R Managing contacts, e.g.: - Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favourite
R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: - Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message
Mercedes me app Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel % Mercedes me calls are not possible in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.
1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)
Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button 1.
MBUX multimedia system 279
Making an emergency call
# To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it brie y.
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 278).
Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:
R Accident and Breakdown Management
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle
You can nd information on the following topics:
R Activation of Mercedes me connect
R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
R Other products and services from MercedesBenz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 281).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system
Requirements: R Access to a mobile phone network is available.
R The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region.
R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g
# Call Mercedes me connect. A er con rmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.
280 MBUX multimedia system
Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre a er automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or break-
down situation.
R The vehicle is stationary.
R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
% This function is not available in all countries.
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.
In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display.
A er quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
# Select Call. R A er your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 283).
R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services.
% Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls.
% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear a er a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.
The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be con rmed or declined. A er being declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you a er a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.
# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. A er your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.
MBUX multimedia system 281
This will contact you to con rm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.
% If you select Later a er the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call
Requirements: R There is an active Mercedes me call via the
multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (/ page 278).
% The prompt to con rm data transfer does not appear in all countries.
If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the processing of your request? message is shown.
# Select Yes. Relevant identi cation data is transmitted automatically.
More information on Mercedes me: https:// www.mercedes.me
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service.
The following requirements must be ful lled for the transfer of the data:
R The vehicle is switched on.
R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
R The quality of the mobile connection is su cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R The available mobile phone transmission technology.
R The activated Mercedes me connect services.
R The service selected in the voice control system.
% A prompt for consent to the data transmission only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated
If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been conrmed the following data is transmitted:
R Vehicle identi cation number
R Time of the call
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Con rmation of the data protection prompt
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R Set language for the multimedia system
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:
R Current mileage and maintenance data
282 MBUX multimedia system
If a call is made a er automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:
R Current mileage and maintenance data
R Current vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been con rmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:
R Current vehicle location
If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an e cient service:
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Rejection of the data protection prompt
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R Set language for the multimedia system
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-speci c data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.
An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system a er the call is nished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.
The incident-speci c data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the
recorded message immediately a er calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
% The recorded message is not available in every country.
Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect
% Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.
You can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example:
R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (automatic emergency call and SOS button)
MBUX multimedia system 283
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 278).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system (/ page 279).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 289).
Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Further information about Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/
baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html
Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management
The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 289)
If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
You may be charged for these services.
R Addition to the emergency guide a er automatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 280)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal
support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics
With the Telediagnostics function, speci c wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.
If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.
284 MBUX multimedia system
More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services
The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on:
R The reason for initiation of the call
R The service that is selected in the voice control system
R The activated Mercedes me connect services
You can nd out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account.
For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated.
You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system.
In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available:
R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account
R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle
R Calling up the Mercedes me services
R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the web browser depending on availability
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu
When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.
Overview of In-Car O ce
Using In-Car O ce, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system.
Requirements for In-Car O ce:
R Your mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 278).
R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal.
R The In-Car O ce service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R You have a user account with an online service, e.g. with O ce 365 or Gmail, and have connected the user account with In-Car O ce.
In-Car O ce functions
R Display pending appointments in the calendar
- Reading out calendar entries
- Calling stored telephone numbers
- Navigating to appointments with navigable destinations
- Deleting a calendar entry
R Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete
- Reading aloud
- Calling stored telephone numbers
- Deleting
R Noting calls
- Declining incoming calls and saving as a task in the Tasks & calls menu
R Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed O
R Managing e-mails
- Showing/reading e-mails
- Writing and forwarding e-mails
% You can start the In-Car O ce function using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.
MBUX multimedia system 285
Web browser overview The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.
1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks
3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards
5 To refresh/stop 6 Options
286 MBUX multimedia system
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.
Overview of smartphone integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.
The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an Internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable.
Apps for Smartphone Integration
R Apple CarPlay®
R Android Auto
% For safety reasons, the rst activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.
You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto from the device manager.
% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.
The following system information is transmitted:
R So ware release of the multimedia system
R System ID (anonymised)
The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly generated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 265).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R Transmission position engaged
R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster
R Drive type
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R Coordinates
R Speed
R Compass direction
R Acceleration direction
MBUX multimedia system 287
This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on available emergency call systems
Two types of emergency call system are available to you in the vehicle: R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries. You can nd more infor-
mation on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ ecall/
The following applies for both emergency call systems:
R The transfer of speci c data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section (/ page 290).
R Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory.
R The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.
R Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile phone network providers o er mobile phone coverage.
For both systems, insu cient network coverage from the mobile phone network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.
288 MBUX multimedia system
Di erences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network.
R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.
R If you decide to use the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network a er the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.
R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.
% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the in uence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastructure of the public reception centres in the respective countries.
% Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certi ed pursuant to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appen-
dix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certi ed according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.
There is the option of deactivating the MercedesBenz emergency call system and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.
Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the following reasons:
R In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak.
R Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of
MBUX multimedia system 289
the emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data.
Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly.
R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.
In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre.
R Should the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre not be available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.
Overview of emergency call systems
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are di cult to access.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically (/ page 289) or manually (/ page 290).
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Messages on the display
The following messages appear in the display of both emergency call systems:
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls call still be transmitted.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.
R G: The icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
% If there is a malfunction in the emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears on the instrument display.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call a er: R Activation of the restraint systems such as air-
bags or seat belt tensioners a er an accident
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is established with the
emergency call centre.
290 MBUX multimedia system
R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel ashes until the emergency call is nished.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.
# Dial the emergency number 112 or an appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 278).
# To use voice control: use the LINGUATRONIC voice commands .
The emergency call has been made:
R A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call
rescue teams and the police to the accident site.
R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the media display.
# Dial the 112 emergency number or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.
Emergency call system data transmission
For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.
Depending on the emergency call system (/ page 287) activated di erent data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.
Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:
Mercedes-Benz emergency call
R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the inci-
dent) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not
This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.
% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public emergency call centre.
MBUX multimedia system 291
112 emergency call
R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the inci-
dent) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident
292 MBUX multimedia system
For accident clari cation purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour a er the emergency call has been initiated:
R The current vehicle position can be determined.
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.
R Emergency call data can be called up.
% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving tra c information, cannot be performed for up to two hours a er sending an emergency call.
Self diagnosis function of the emergency call system
Your car veri es the operability of the emergency call system each time the vehicle is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the display.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds a er switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is
switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
Requirements: R The starter battery is su ciently charged. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
% The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example: R Russia R Belarus R Kazakhstan R Armenia R Kyrgyzstan
# To start the test mode: press and hold the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least ve seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends a er the language test has been performed.
# To stop manual test mode: switch o the vehicle. The test mode is ended.
Information on data processing
Processing of personal data via the MercedesBenz emergency call system All processing of personal data via the MercedesBenz emergency call system corresponds with the speci cations in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)".
The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident.
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has
MBUX multimedia system 293
the right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.
Processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the speci cations in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital interests of the a ected person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR.
The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.
Data recipient The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are
speci ed to rst receive and handle emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located.
Arrangements for data processing
Both emergency call systems are designed so that the following requirements are ful lled:
R The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
R Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking in normal operation.
R The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continuously deleted.
R The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available.
R The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only kept for as long as is required to ful l the purpose of handling the
emergency call, however for no longer than 13 hours a er the time that an emergency call is initiated.
Rights of persons a ected by the data processing The person a ected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that a ects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.
The person a ected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.
Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeau ragter für den Datenschutz, Daimler AG, HPC G353, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
294 MBUX multimedia system
Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu
Symbol 6
Designation Play
8
Rest
:
Repeat a track
9 û/ü ß 5
ª
Random playback Skip forwards/back Options Categories
Search
Function Select to start or continue playback.
Select to pause the playback.
Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. Select to play back the tracks in random order.
Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
Select to show additional options.
Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
Symbol Z © j 2
Designation Settings Home Messaging Full screen
Function Select to make settings. Select to return to the home screen. Select to call up messaging. Select to switch to full screen mode.
MBUX multimedia system 295
The following functions and settings are available in the media menu:
R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®)
R Playing back audio or video les
R Streaming online music
Authorising a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem and audio equipment.
R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio pro les A2DP and AVRCP.
R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª
With Bluetooth® audio, you can play back music les from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system.
# To play back audio les using the multimedia system, authorise the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.
Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device
# Select Connect new device.
296 MBUX multimedia system
# Select an audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If the codes are identical, con rm on the audio equipment.
# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth® audio equipment
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established.
Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu
Symbol ©
Designation Home
j
Messaging
û/ü
Skip forwards/back
Function Select to return to the home screen. Select to call up messaging. Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
Symbol Z
2 8 f 4 ª
Designation Settings
Full screen Silent function Store radio stations Station list Search
MBUX multimedia system 297
Function
Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and tra c announcements R Frequency x function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent. Select to switch to the DAB slide show. This function is not available in all countries. Select to switch o the sound.
Select to save a station in the presets.
Select to have the station list shown.
Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
298 MBUX multimedia system
Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be trans-
mitted when using TuneIn Radio.
Symbol Z
Designation Settings
ß
6/8 5
Favourites Play/Pause Browse
Depending on the frequency band selected, di erent functions are available to you.
Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.
Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements: R A Mercedes me account is available.
Function
The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account
Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favourite.
Select to start, stop or continue playback.
Select to choose a category and then a radio station.
R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes me account.
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
% The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio
# Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.
Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system tted. You can nd
out which sound system is tted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equaliser
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume
- Automatic adjustment
Burmester® surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equaliser:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround
sound system only) R Sound pro les
MBUX multimedia system 299
R Volume: - Automatic adjustment
300 Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the next regular service due date. Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date will be displayed. You can hide this service display using the back button G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS
The next service due date is displayed.
# To exit the display: press the back button G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel.
Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 248).
Information on regular maintenance work
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter-
vals. # Always have the prescribed maintenance
work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Irreparable damage to the high-voltage battery due to maintenance work not being carried out
The high-voltage battery is subject to wear. Maintenance work which is not carried out in time can lead to irreparable damage to the high-voltage battery.
# Always observe the warning messages about the high-voltage battery and immediately consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Notes on special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more o en than specied if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. This is the case for frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces, for example.
Maintenance and care 301
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air lter changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more o en than speci ed based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.
# Display and note down the service due date on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 300).
Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 70 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated active bonnet yourself (/ page 301).
A er the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited.
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored in a quali ed specialist workshop.
Resetting the active bonnet
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot components in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the drive system and the cooler.
# Allow the drive system to cool down and touch only the components described below.
# With your hand at, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and you may hear a hissing sound. The engine bonnet must engage in position.
# If active bonnet 1 can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly.
302 Maintenance and care
Opening and closing the bonnet
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine
bonnet is locked.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement. # Do not open or close the bonnet if there
is a person in the bonnet's range of movement.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated vehicle or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
# In the event of overheating or re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down rst if you need to open the bonnet.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched o .
Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
# Remove jewellery and watches.
# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot components in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the drive system and the cooler.
# Allow the drive system to cool down and touch only the components described below.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch o the windscreen wipers and the vehicle rst if you need to open the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
Maintenance and care 303
# To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.
# Push yellow handle 1 on the bonnet catch to the le as far as it will go (palm downwards). Li the bonnet until it is automatically raised by the pneumatic spring.
Closing the bonnet
# Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a height of approximately 20 cm.
304 Maintenance and care
# If the bonnet can still be li ed slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly.
Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
If you open the cap when the drive system is at normal operating temperature, you could be scalded. # Let the vehicle cool down before opening
the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
# Only have the coolant checked or re lled at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Topping up the windscreen washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot components in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the drive system and the cooler. # Allow the drive system to cool down and
touch only the components described below.
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ammable. # Avoid re, naked ames, smoking and
the creation of sparks when using windscreen washer concentrate.
# Remove cap 1 by the tab.
# Top up the washer uid. % Further information about the windscreen
washer uid (/ page 354)
Keeping the air-water duct free
# Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.
Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power a er washing the vehicle
Braking e ciency is reduced a er washing the vehicle. # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # during towing # in a car wash
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
Maintenance and care 305
# Ensure there is su cient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is su cient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
R The HOLD function is switched o .
R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is switched o .
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
R The blower for the ventilation/heating is switched o .
R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g. R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
306 Maintenance and care
R In automatic car washes with conveyor systems:
- Neutral i is engaged.
- If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged.
% If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into the automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h Activate (/ page 306).
The following settings are made when car wash mode is activated:
R The outside mirrors are folded in.
R To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor is deactivated.
R The rear window wiper is deactivated.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.
R The air conditioning system is set to air-recirculation mode.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
R Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image is activated a er approx. eight seconds.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective setting.
Above a speed of 20 km/h Car wash mode is automatically deactivated.
The following settings are reset when car wash mode is deactivated:
R The outside mirrors are folded out.
R The rain sensor is activated.
R The rear window wiper is activated.
R The air conditioning system is set to fresh air mode.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is reset to the previously selected setting.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof remain closed.
R Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode
Requirements: R the vehicle is stationary. R the engine is running.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
Activating automatic car wash mode # Select Car wash mode. # Select Start.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective setting. % For an overview of the settings made when
activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 305).
Maintenance and care 307
Deactivating automatic car wash mode # Select Stop.
The automatic car wash settings are reset. % The automatic car wash mode is automatically
deactivated as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. # Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with
round-spray nozzles. # Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner:
R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the highpressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, such as tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.
Washing the vehicle by hand
observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a
so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 309).
Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care
To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:
Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o
a erwards.
308 Maintenance and care
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter uid.
R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matt nish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
R Do not use car wash programmes with a nal hot wax treatment.
R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
In the event of paintwork damage:
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 196).
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matt nish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care" (/ page 307). They also apply to matt decorative foils.
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.
Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably.
R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative foil is dull: Use the Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards.
R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse o a erwards.
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and colouring of decorative
foils are impaired by:
- Sunlight
- Temperature, e.g. hot air blower
- Weather conditions
- Stone chippings and dirt
- Chemical cleaning agents
Maintenance and care 309
- Oily products
R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the e ect of shining the foilwrapped surface.
R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer.
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di erences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a decorative foil.
% Have work or repairs to decorative foils carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Notes on care of car parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch o the windscreen wipers and the drive system before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts:
Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes
a er cleaning before parking it. The brake disks and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
% A er changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots.
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available (/ page 196).
Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 145).
310 Maintenance and care
R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
% Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too o en.
Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery) R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the
vehicle socket.
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents, such as soap.
Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump-
ers with a so cloth and car shampoo (/ page 196).
R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.
Reversing camera and 360° Camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 235). R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the
camera lens. R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking o a er the use of solvent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products
containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:
Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display R Switch o the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a micro bre
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFTLCD). R Do not use any other agents.
Head-up display R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents.
Maintenance and care 311
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials.
R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim.
Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a micro bre cloth.
R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Roof lining R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA
* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the nish.
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as di erences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour di erences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and
not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.
Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
% Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus signi cantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g. jeans, can leave discolouration on the leather.
DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
312 Maintenance and care
Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth and 1%
soapy water and allow to dry.
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the stowage compartments in the driver's and front passenger door.
# Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest.
% There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.
3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements de ned by the legal standard are only ful lled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
R the re ective strips are damaged or dirty
R the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
R the uorescence has faded
Breakdown assistance 313 Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle
Vehicles with two rows of seats
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature
314 Breakdown assistance
Setting up the warning triangle
First-aid kit (so -sided) overview
Vehicles with three rows of seats
# Open the load compartment oor. # Remove warning triangle 1.
# Fold side re ectors 1 upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper pressstud 2.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.
Vehicles with two rows of seats
Vehicles with three rows of seats
First-aid kit (so sided) 1 is under the load compartment oor.
Removing the re extinguisher
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the driver's footwell
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
# Always store and secure the re extinguisher in the bracket.
# Do not remove the re extinguisher while driving.
# Le -hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards. # Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 down-
wards. # Remove re extinguisher 2.
Flat tyre Notes on at tyres
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a at tyre
A at tyre severely a ects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.
Breakdown assistance 315
Tyres without run- at characteristics:
# Do not drive with a at tyre.
# Change the at tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Tyres with run- at characteristics:
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres).
In the event of a at tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:
R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres) (/ page 316).
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 317).
316 Breakdown assistance
R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 278).
R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 342).
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle. # Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of the MOExtended tyres. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o -road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R banging noise
R vehicle vibration
R smoke which smells like rubber
R continuous ESP® intervention
R cracks in the tyre sidewalls
# A er driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a quali ed specialist workshop with regard to their further use.
# The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.
With MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre a ected must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:
R Check the tyre for damage.
R If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode a er the pressure loss warning:
Load condition
Driving distance possible in emergency mode
Partially laden
80 km
Fully laden
30 km
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
The TIREFIT kit is located under the luggage compartment oor.
Vehicles with two rows of seats 1 Tyre in ation compressor 2 Tyre sealant bottle
Vehicles with three rows of seats 1 Tyre sealant bottle 2 Tyre in ation compressor
Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the boot oor.
% You can nd information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre in ation compressor:
R LK2 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
Breakdown assistance 317
At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre in ation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply: R Emissions sound pressure level
LPA 83 dB (A) R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A)
The tyre in ation compressor is maintenancefree. If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Required tools: R Tyre sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker R Sticker with details of the maximum permissi-
ble speed R Tyre in ation compressor R Gloves
TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 316)
318 Breakdown assistance
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20°C.
& WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases: R there are large cuts or punctures in the
tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned) R the wheel rims have been damaged R a er journeys with very low tyre pressure or with at tyres
# Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact
with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children.
Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:
# Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.
# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately.
# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately.
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre in ation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre sealant bottle.
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed specialist workshop every ve years.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.
# Remove sticker 1 from the tyre in ation
compressor housing and a x it to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision.
Breakdown assistance 319
# Turn tyre sealant bottle 9 a quarter turn clockwise.
# Insert the plug of ller hose 3 in socket 5 of tyre sealant bottle 9.
# Turn ller hose 3 a quarter turn clockwise.
# Remove sticker 2 from the tyre sealant bot-
tle and a x it near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
# Pull plug 7 with the cable and ller hose 3 out of the tyre in ation compressor housing.
# Insert tyre sealant bottle 9 in socket 6 of the tyre in ation compressor in such a way that the red arrow on tyre sealant bottle 9 matches the red arrow on the tyre in ation compressor.
# Remove the valve cap from valve A on the faulty tyre.
# Screw union nut 4 of ller hose 3 onto valve A.
# Insert plug 7 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.
# Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
320 Breakdown assistance
# Press on and o switch 8 on the tyre in ation compressor. The tyre in ation compressor is switched on. The tyre is in ated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may brie y rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch o the tyre in ation compressor during this phase!
# Let the tyre in ation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the a ected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.
If, a er ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor.
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose.
# Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.
# Pump up the tyre again. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tyre pressure not being attained
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not attained a er the speci ed time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Do not continue driving.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
A er use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the lling hose. # Therefore, place the lling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
If, a er ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch o the tyre in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose.
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
# Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
# The sticker with details of the maximum permissible speed must be a xed to the instrument cluster where it can be easily seen by the driver.
* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
A er use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the lling hose.
# Therefore, place the lling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants.
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre in ation compressor and the warning triangle.
# Pull away immediately.
# Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre in ation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tyre pressure not being attained
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
Breakdown assistance 321
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will nd a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the Bpillar on the driver's side. # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel ller ap for values.
Increasing the tyre pressure # Switch on the tyre in ation compressor.
Decreasing the tyre pressure # Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre
in ation compressor. # Insert the ller hose in the socket of the tyre
in ation compressor and turn it a quarter turn clockwise.
322 Breakdown assistance
Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery
# Press pressure release button C next to manometer B.
When the tyre pressure is correct
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre in ation compressor.
# Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and lling hose replaced there.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.
The highly ammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases.
# Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
If you do not want to use the vehicle for a long period of time, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Notes on the high-voltage battery
& DANGER Risk of explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery
Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the event of a vehicle re. # Stop the charging process immediately
in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.
Breakdown assistance 323
# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a su cient distance.
# Call the re brigade.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 171).
Risk of explosion.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
324 Breakdown assistance
Wear safety glasses. Keep children away.
Replacing the 12 V battery
# Only have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery # Only have starting assistance provided by a
quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. # Only have the battery charged at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Tow-starting or towing away Overview of the permitted towing methods
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # during towing # in a car wash
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
If you notice that the vehicle has lost coolant, do not have it towed away. Have the vehicle transported instead.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Vehicles with front wheel drive Permitted towing methods
Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at the ground 50 km/h*, only forwards with
the driver in the cockpit.
Front axle raised
Yes, maximum 50 km* at 50 km/h
Rear axle
No
raised
*The towing range can be signi cantly lower depending on the active auxiliary consumers and environmental conditions.
4MATIC vehicles Permitted towing methods
Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at the ground 50 km/h*, only forwards with
the driver in the cockpit.
Front axle
No
raised
Rear axle
No
raised
*The towing range can be signi cantly lower depending on the active auxiliary consumers and environmental conditions.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 324).
# Make sure that the 12 V battery is connected and charged.
Breakdown assistance 325
Observe the following points when the 12 V battery is disconnected or discharged:
R the drive system cannot be started
R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
R the transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or j
In the following situations, only transporting the vehicle is permitted:
R if the transmission cannot be shi ed to i R if the 12 V battery is disconnected or dis-
charged
R if the display in the instrument cluster is not working
R if the á Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual message is displayed
R if the + Top up coolant See Owner's Manual message is displayed
R if the d Stop Switch off the vehicle message is displayed
326 Breakdown assistance
# In such cases, transport the vehicle (/ page 327).
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be
exceeded. # A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R the towing eye may become detached.
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
# Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 350).
Towing away the vehicle
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 328).
# Fasten the towing device.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 85).
# Do not activate the HOLD function.
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 101).
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 220).
# Shi the transmission to position i.
# Release the electric parking brake.
# Remain in the cockpit during towing and observe the display messages.
# Do not switch o the vehicle while it is being towed.
# Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the transmission will otherwise automatically shi to j.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations: R the vehicle is switched o . R the brake system or power steering system
is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
# In such cases, do not tow the vehicle.
# Transport the vehicle (/ page 327).
* NOTE Damage to the drive system due to incorrect towing
The vehicle may not be towed in the following situations: R the vehicle is switched o . R the brake system or power steering system
is malfunctioning.
Breakdown assistance 327
R the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
# In such cases, do not tow the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 324).
# Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
# Shi the transmission to position i.
% The transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shi to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 324).
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
# Shi the transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
When transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid.
# Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h when transporting.
328 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly
# A er loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
# A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels a er loading.
* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.
Fitting and removing the towing eye
Towing eye storage location Towing eye is under the load compartment oor.
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
# Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to
tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch
to tow the vehicle during recovery.
Tow-starting the vehicle
# If the drive system does not start, have the vehicle transported to a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# The drive system cannot be started by towstarting the vehicle. Do not perform any attempts to tow-start the vehicle.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a re. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
ed new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their functionality may be signi cantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the col-
Breakdown assistance 329
our and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment (/ page 330).
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched o . R The vehicle is switched o .
330 Breakdown assistance
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
le -hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 330) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 331) R Fuse box in the centre of the load compartment (/ page 332)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment
Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 329).
Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before opening the engine bonnet.
# Open the bonnet.
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws 1.
# Press clamps 2 and li the fuse box lid up and out.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned correctly
in the lid. # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Make sure that clamps 2 engage.
# Tighten screws 1.
# Close the bonnet.
Opening
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 329).
# Li carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow.
Breakdown assistance 331
# Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top.
Closing # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Tighten screws 2. # Fold back the carpet.
332 Breakdown assistance Opening and closing the fuse box in the load compartment Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 329). # Open the load compartment oor.
Fuse box 1 is located underneath the load compartment oor.
Wheels and tyres 333
Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
& WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. # Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insu cient tyre tread
Insu cient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for:
R Summer tyres: 3 mm
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving o road:
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 334).
R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect snow chain tting
If you t snow chains to the rear wheels, the snow chains may grind against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. # Never t snow chains to the rear wheels. # Always t snow chains to the front
wheels in pairs.
334 Wheels and tyres
* NOTE Damage to vehicle body or suspension components caused by tted snow chains
On 4MATIC vehicles, if you t snow chains on the rear wheels, you can damage vehicle body or suspension components.
# On 4MATIC vehicles, only t snow chains on the front wheels.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains:
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
R If snow chains are tted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are tted.
% You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 207).
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 200). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tyre pressure Notes on tyre pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient or excessive tyre pressure
Underin ated or overin ated tyres pose in particular the following risks: R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or
unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly:
R monthly R when the load changes R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. o -
road driving
# Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.
Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.
# Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
# Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory- tted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the socket ap (/ page 335).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer.
Tyre pressure table
The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the socket ap.
Wheels and tyres 335
The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for those tyre sizes.
336 Wheels and tyres
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's ride comfort. Energy consumption may then increase slightly.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are de ned in the table for di erent numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may di er from this.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 334)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function of the tyre pressure monitoring system The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 336).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with
display messages (/ page 403) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 417).
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation.
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values a er you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 337).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R incorrect reference values were taught in
R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
R there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres One of the following displays appears: R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of
the individual wheels:
R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving
Wheels and tyres 337
R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
# Compare the tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 335). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres (/ page 334).
% The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system
Requirements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 334).
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:
R The tyre pressure has changed.
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly tted.
On-board computer:
4 Service 5 Tyres
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the Instrument Display.
# To restart, press Touch Control on the le hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is shown in the Instrument Display.
Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
A er you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the speci ed range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 334)
Wheel change Notes on selecting, tting and replacing tyres
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tyres with
those that ful l the speci cations of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type
For tyres, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type
338 Wheels and tyres
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the speci ed tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode. # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through tyre types and sizes that have not been approved
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run- at tyres only for certain wheels)
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)
Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely a ected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.
# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases.
# Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
# Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
# Avoid particularly high kerbs.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes
Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tyres. # If possible, park only on at surfaces. # Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre- tting tools
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre- tting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. The tools could damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tyres changed at a quali ed
specialist workshop only.
Wheels and tyres 339
* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre. # At temperatures below 7 °C use i
M+S tyres.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and enquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres
The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk
of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased.
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.
# Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
# Use i M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C.
# Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.
Observe the following when selecting, tting and replacing tyres:
R Country-speci c requirements for tyre approval that de ne a speci c tyre type for your vehicle.
R Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly bene cial.
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
340 Wheels and tyres
R Only t wheels of the same size on one axle (le and right).
It is only permissible to t a di erent wheel size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
R Do not make any modi cations to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all tted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system.
R At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all wheels.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres tted.
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision.
R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the rst 100 km.
R Replace the tyres a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run- at characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tyres that do not feature run- at characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.
% You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 207).
For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 334)
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 335)
R Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 346)
Notes on interchanging wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through di erent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged. # Only interchange the front and rear
wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have di erent dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels di er: R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 342).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following notes:
R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.
tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel:
R Jack
R Chock
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker a xed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 in the load compartment.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing
Wheels and tyres 341 Vehicles with two rows of seats Vehicles with three rows of seats
342 Wheels and tyres
The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centring pin R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground. R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyrechange tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist workshop to nd out about suitable tools.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
# Shi the transmission to position j.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle.
R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 342).
Important notes on using the jack:
R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle.
R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle.
R Never lie under the vehicle.
R Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.
# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.
Position of jack support points
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
Wheels and tyres 343
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to using an unsuitable jack
You can damage the vehicle and, in particular the high-voltage battery, if you use a jack that is not speci cally designed for the jack support points of the vehicle. # Only use jacks that are speci cally
designed for the jack support points, or use an appropriate adapter.
* NOTE Risk of damage to the vehicle due to incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack at the designated jack support points, you could damage your vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage battery. # Only position the jack at the designated
jack support points.
# Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
344 Wheels and tyres
Removing a wheel
Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 342).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1.
# Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 344).
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
# Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.
# Remove the wheel.
Fitting a new wheel
Requirements: R The wheel to be changed is removed and the
centring pin is screwed in (/ page 344).
Wheels and tyres 345
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
# In the event of damage to the threads, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
# Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 337).
For tyres with a speci ed direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when tting.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on.
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 337).
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are nger-tight.
# Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is ngertight.
# Lower the vehicle (/ page 345).
Lowering the vehicle a er a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been tted (/ page 344). # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto
the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the speci ed tightening torque of 150 Nm.
346 Wheels and tyres
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 337).
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi cantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.
To prevent hazardous situations:
# Drive carefully.
# Never t more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers in size.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel brie y.
# Do not deactivate ESP®.
# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a di erent size replaced at the nearest quali ed specialist work-
shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
Observe the following notes on tting an emergency spare wheel:
R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h.
R Do not t the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel tted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
% The speci ed tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
% Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes a er an emergency spare wheel is tted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 334)
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 335)
R Notes on tting tyres (/ page 337)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 342)
Wheels and tyres 347
348 Technical data
Notes on technical data The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only for certain countries: you can nd vehiclespeci c vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle.
On-board electronics Notes on tampering with the engine electronics
* NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. # Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Two-way radios
Notes on tting two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retro tted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular:
R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
R The exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is not a low-re ection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
# Have the low-re ection exterior aerial tted at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the lowre ection exterior aerial.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.
# Only use approved frequency bands.
# Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands.
# Only use approved aerial positions.
1 Rear roof area
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, tting an aerial is not permitted.
Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of a ermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.
Technical data 349
If your vehicle has ttings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when tting.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table.
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band
Maximum transmission output
2 m frequency band 144-174 MHz
50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm frequency band 430 - 470 MHz
35 W
Frequency band
Maximum transmission output
Two-way radio
2W
2G
Two-way radio 3G/4G/5G
0.5 W
The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:
R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands:
R TETRA
R 2G/3G/4G/5G
350 Technical data
Regulatory radio identi cation and notes
Regulatory radio identi cation of small components
Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
Further component-speci c information
Further component-speci c information can be found using the key phrase "further componentspeci c information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview
Vehicle identi cation plate
Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia
Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
% These are not small components. Information about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation of small components".
Technical data 351
5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for speci c countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
VIN in the engine compartment The VIN can be found on the crossmember in the engine compartment. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Kuwait) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Vehicle model 5 VIN
Vehicle identi cation plate (example: all other countries)
1 Vehicle manufacturer
2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)
352 Technical data VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen
1 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as label The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in some countries. Motor number Further information on motor numbers can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Operating uids Notes on operating uids
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating uids harmful to your health
Operating uids may be poisonous and harmful to your health. # Observe the text on the original contain-
ers when using, storing or disposing of operating uids. # Always store operating uids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operating uids.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating uids
Incorrect disposal of operating uids can cause considerable damage to the environment.
# Dispose of operating uids in an environmentally responsible manner.
Operating uids include the following: R lubricants R coolant R brake uid R windscreen washer uid R climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating uids is available at the following locations:
R in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids by entering the designation
- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
R at a quali ed specialist workshop
# Have the brake uid renewed at the speci ed intervals.
Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a qualied specialist workshop. Only use a brake uid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Notes on brake uid
Note the instructions about operating uids (/ page 352).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system
The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard.
This impairs the braking e ect.
Coolant
Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 352).
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.
# Allow the drive system to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the ller opening.
Technical data 353
# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant
# Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection.
Information on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for
Operating Fluids 320.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App R At a quali ed specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not su ciently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.
354 Technical data
# Only use coolant approved by MercedesBenz.
# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids 320.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
to about -37°C) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45°C)
Notes on windscreen washer uid
Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 352).
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ammable. If it comes into contact with hot components, it may ignite.
# Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled near to the ller opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer uid
Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.
# Only use windscreen washer uids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer uids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer uids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the ll level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windscreen washer uid: R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all year round.
Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions
The heights speci ed may vary as a result of the following factors: R tyres R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment
Height when opened and headroom
Model
1
Height when opened
2 Headroom
All models
2111 mm 1939 mm
Vehicle dimensions All models
Vehicle length
4684 mm
Vehicle width including outside 2020 mm mirrors
Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors
1834 mm
Vehicle height
1701 mm
Wheelbase
2829 mm
Technical data 355
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the specied vehicle data:
R Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.
R Vehicle-speci c weight information can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 350).
Roof load Model
Maximum roof load
All models
75 kg
High-voltage battery
Notes on the power supply for vehicles with a high-voltage battery In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identi ers are located on the vehicle in the following places:
R On the inside of the socket ap
R On the charging cable connector
356 Technical data Charging stations in European countries are also equipped with energy supply identi ers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations where the charging station identi er corresponds to the vehicle identi er. For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 171).
1 Supply type: AC Standard: EN 62196-2 Style: type 2 Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 480 V RMS
2 Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Style: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
3 Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Style: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
Maximum battery capacity and charging times All models
Type
Lithium-ion
Usable energy content
66.5 kWh
Range
All models
Charge time mode 4
with approx. 100 kW charging capacity
Approx. 30 min
Charge time mode 3
with 11 kW charging capacity (depending on the condition of the vehicle body)
Approx. 5 h 45 min
Charge time mode 2
Approx. 18 h
with 3.7 kW charging capacity
15 min
Charge time mode 2
Approx. 30 h
with 2.3 kW charging capacity
Charging times modes 2 and 3 apply to AC charging from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content.
Charging time mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content.
The time taken to charge the battery depends on the charge status of the battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery.
The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply.
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover (/ page 171).
Technical data 357
358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Introduction
Information about display messages Display messages appear on the instrument display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simpli ed in the Owner's Manual and may di er from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.
For some display messages, symbols will also be shown:
R Õ Further information
R ¨ Hide display message
With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the le or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on
the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the back button P or the le -hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the display message has been recti ed.
Calling up saved display messages On-board computer:
4 Service 5 1 message
If there are no display messages, No messages will appear on the instrument display.
# Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To exit the message memory: press the back button P.
Occupant safety Display messages
6
Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop
6
Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
6
Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual
* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 53). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361
Display messages
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 53). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The PRESAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Key
Display messages
Á
Replace key
Á
Change key batteries
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have the key replaced.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The key battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 81).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363
Display messages
Á
Key not detected (white display message)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The key is currently undetected. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 160).
Á
Key not detected (red display message)
* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.
Á
If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 160).
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key. # Wait until processing is complete.
Key being initialised Please wait
364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Key detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 160).
Lights Display messages
:
Left dipped beam (example)
:
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Malfunction See Owner's Manual
Display messages
:
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Automatic driving lights inoperative
:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
Switch on headlamps
:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position.
Switch off lights
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365
366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Climate control Display messages
&
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum charge.
inoperative High-voltage battery charging incomplete
&
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery.
inoperative Charge HV battery
&
Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again after engine start
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than three times with the vehicle switched o .
# Start the vehicle for ten seconds. Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
Display messages
&
Pre-entry climate control (via key) inoperative HVbattery low
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery. When the high-voltage battery is su ciently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.
Drive system
Display messages
d
Performance severely limited
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. Output and range are severely restricted. # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. # A er waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.
If the display message appears again: # Drive on carefully. # Fully charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 171).
If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.
368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
v
Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual
ò
Acoustic presence indicator inoperative
To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 324).
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No driving noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users. # Drive with particular care. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # To switch o the drive system while the vehicle is in motion (/ page 160).
Display messages
+
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual
ÿ
Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Damage to the drive system due to insu cient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.
# Have the cooling system of the drive system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. * The coolant is too hot.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated vehicle or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # In the event of overheating or re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re
service. # Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down rst if you need to open the bonnet.
# Wait until the drive system has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the vehicle radiator is not obstructed.
370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
ÿ
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.
* The cooling system has detected a component fault. # Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.
è
Charger cable connected Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected. # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket. # Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed a er that: # Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button attached to the
charging station or the emergency call numbers. * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
# Start the charging process at a di erent charging station. or # Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371
Display messages Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual
AC charging inoperative Consult workshop
DC charging inoperative Consult workshop
Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.
* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures. Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow reduced power output warning lamp _ is lit. Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal (e.g. a er a short trip), the full output will be available again. The display message and the yellow reduced power output warning lamp _ will go out. # Drive on carefully.
372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Û
Stop immediately Drive will be deactivated Charge high-volt. battery Please wait. Battery has not yet reached operating temperature. Engine cannot start.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The high-voltage battery is not charged su ciently. Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow reduced power output warning lamp _ is lit. # Drive on carefully. # Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The charge level of the high-voltage battery is so low that it is no longer possible to drive the vehicle. The drive system can no longer be restarted. When the drive system is restarted, the message Stop immediately Drive will be deactivated Charge high-volt. battery will appear again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 171).
* Operational readiness is established õ and the transmission position j is engaged. The high-voltage battery is warmed up to the operating temperature. This process can take a few minutes and may be prolonged if defrosting of the windscreen ¬ is activated. The heating process ends when transmission position h is engaged. However, when driving, the output is signi cantly limited until the high-voltage battery has reached its operating temperature.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373
Display messages
Û
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible
Û
Malfunction
Û
Malfunction Visit workshop
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of re. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. the air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. # Do not continue driving. # If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* There is a serious malfunction if the display message and warning tone are repeated at short intervals. You must stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions because the drive system is automatically deactivated. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch o the vehicle and consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Without starting engine again, consult workshop
ô
Reserve level Charge highvoltage battery
#
12 V battery See Owner's Manual
d
Malfunction
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction. # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. * The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range. # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 171).
* The drive system is o and the charge level of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. # Drive the vehicle for 3060 minutes. or # Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 171). If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375
Display messages
d
Stop Switch engine off
d
Malfunction Visit workshop
High-voltage battery maintenance required urgently. No start in approx. XXX km (yellow display message)
High-voltage battery maintenance required urgently. No start in approx. XXX km(red display message)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The drive system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not continue driving. # Do not tow the vehicle, stop towing if necessary. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system a er the distance displayed has been covered. # Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system a er the distance displayed has been covered. # Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
High-voltage battery maintenance required urgently. Without engine restart, consult workshop
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It will no longer be possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched o . # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
d
Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R malfunctions in the power supply R signal interference # Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377
Display messages Head-up display inoperative
Ù
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The head-up display has an internal error.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual
* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
C
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.
? A
* The bonnet is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Close the bonnet. * The tailgate is open. # Close the tailgate.
Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction
* The anti-the alarm system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages
_
2nd seat row, left Not locked
_
2nd seat row, right Not locked
¥
Top up washer fluid
Wiper malfunctioning
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The le -hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (/ page 108). # Make sure that the seat is engaged (/ page 108).
* The right-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (/ page 108). # Make sure that the seat is engaged (/ page 108).
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Top up the washer uid (/ page 304).
* The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Transmission
Display messages Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position
To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine
Apply brake to select D or R
Apply brake to select R
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position.
* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k.
* You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381
Display messages
Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling
Without changing gear, consult workshop
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop Transmission Malfunction Stop
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Select transmission position k.
* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.
* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.
382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Brakes
Display messages
!
Parking brake See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 195).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 195).
Display messages
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 194). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 195).
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.
To apply: # Switch o the vehicle.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 195).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 195).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
Display messages
!
Release parking brake
!
Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake
J
Check brake fluid level
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 194). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 195). # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o . # Switch on the vehicle.
* There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Do not top up the brake uid.
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
ë
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 200).
Off
é
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387
Display messages
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!
h
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 202). # If necessary, take a break.
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 205).
- - - km/h Cruise control inoperative
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative Cruise control off
* Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 204).
388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
È
- - - km/h Limiter passive
Limiter inoperative
ç
- - - km/h
ç
suspended
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode (/ page 205).
* The limiter is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 209).
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 207).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389
Display messages
ç
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 209).
Off Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Distance Assist inoperative
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 207). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Distance Assist available again Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist inoperative
ð
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 209).
* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only). # Drive more slowly.
Maximum speed exceeded
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h
* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391
Display messages Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Steering Assist inoperative
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops
Beginning emergency stop
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 213). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more.
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 215). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering
392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Ø
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist inoperative
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 213). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions.
* Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on
* Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 224). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or
Display messages
Blind Spot Assist inoperative
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 224). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 227). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages
¸ Ã ç Ä
temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 196). # Restart the vehicle.
396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
á Ã Ä Ø Ô
temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular.
% This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 196). # Restart the vehicle.
Display messages
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h
Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems
Display messages
! ÷
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
Display messages
! ÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
÷
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
* ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages
T ! ÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRESAFE® PLUS
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Display messages
G
Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403
Display messages
Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 35). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Battery
Display messages Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* It is not possible to start the vehicle. A malfunction has occurred in the drive system. # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. # A er waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again. # If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor
Display messages Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Tyre press. monitor inoperative
Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors
h
Wheel sensor(s) missing
h
Check tyre(s)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed. # Drive on.
* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected tyre. # Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signi cantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.
Display messages
h
Rectify tyre pressure
h
Warning tyre defect
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyre pressure (/ page 334) and the tyres. * The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the di erence in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 337).
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Tyre(s) overheated
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre R The tyres can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a at tyre. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible
speed with a at MOExtended tyre. # Observe the notes on at tyres.
Notes in the event of a at tyre (/ page 315). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyres. * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Display messages Reduce speed
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or ash a er the vehicle has been started or during a journey.
Standard instrument display
Widescreen cockpit instrument display
Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may di er from the example shown.
408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Indicator and warning lamps:
6
Restraint system (/ page 409)
ü
Seat belt (/ page 409)
_
Reduced power (/ page 410)
Ú
System error (/ page 410)
#
Electrical fault (/ page 410)
Ù
Power steering (/ page 411)
!
Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 412)
!
Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 412)
J
Brakes (yellow) (/ page 412)
J
Brakes (red) (/ page 412)
L
Distance warning (/ page 414)
Ó
Active Brake Assist (/ page 414)
ê
Active Brake Assist (/ page 414)
!
ABS (/ page 415)
÷
ESP® (/ page 415)
å
ESP® OFF (/ page 415)
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 417)
T
Standing lights (/ page 139)
L
Low beam (/ page 139)
K
High beam (/ page 140)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 140)
R
Rear fog light (/ page 139)
Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp
6
Restraint system warning lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp ashes
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the instrument display. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 47). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 47).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Drive system
Warning/indicator lamp
_
Reduced warning lamp power
Ú
System error warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ. There is a malfunction in the drive system. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
Warning/indicator lamp
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault with the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp
Ù
Power steering warning lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.
412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp
!
Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)
!
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp
J
Brake system warning lamp (yellow)
* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413
Warning/indicator lamp
J
Brake system warning lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected. R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not top up the brake uid.
414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp
L
Warning lamp for distance warning function
Ó
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 216). * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 216).
Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp
!
ABS warning lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp ashes
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 198). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
å
ESP® OFF warning lamp
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
Warning/indicator lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 198).
Tyre pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Index 419
1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC All-wheel distribution.............................. 171 Function................................................ 171
12 V battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)
12 V socket see Socket (12 V)
115 V socket see Socket (115 V)
230 V socket see Socket (230 V)
360° Camera Care...................................................... 309 Function................................................ 232 Opening the camera cover (reversing camera)................................................. 235 Selecting a view..................................... 234 Switching automatic operation on/o (reversing camera)................................. 235
A
A/C function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 152 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 152
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).................... 198
Accident and Breakdown Management Mercedes me connect........................... 283
Acoustic locking veri cation signal Activating/deactivating............................ 80
Acoustic presence indicator (sound generator)
Notes..................................................... 157
Active Blind Spot Assist Brake application................................... 226 Function................................................ 224 System limitations.................................. 224
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation.............................................. 301 Resetting............................................... 301
Active Brake Assist Function/notes...................................... 216 Setting................................................... 220
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 215 Calling up a speed................................. 209 Function................................................ 207 Increasing/decreasing speed................. 209 Route-based speed adaptation............... 212 Selecting............................................... 209 Storing a speed...................................... 209 Switching o /deactivating..................... 209 Switching on/activating......................... 209 System limitations.................................. 207
Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... 215
Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 229 Activating/deactivating the warning....... 229 Function................................................ 227 Setting the sensitivity............................. 229 System limits......................................... 227
Active Parking Assist Exiting a parking space.......................... 242 Function................................................ 239 Parking.................................................. 241 System limitations.................................. 239
420 Index
Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... 211 Function................................................ 211
Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 215 Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 215 Function................................................ 213 System limits......................................... 213
Adaptive brake lights.................................... 202
Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Additional door lock....................................... 82
A er-sales service see ASSYST PLUS
Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 152
Air distribution Setting................................................... 151 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 153
Air inlet see Air-water duct
Air pressure see Tyre pressure
Air vents Adjusting (front)..................................... 156 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 156
Air vents see Air vents
Air-conditioning system see Climate control
Air-recirculation mode (with ne particle pre lter).......................................... 153
Air-water duct Keeping free.......................................... 305
Airbag Activation................................................ 44 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 49 Installation locations................................ 49 Knee airbag............................................. 49 Overview.................................................. 49 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 53 Protection................................................ 50 Reduced protection.................................. 51 Side airbag.............................................. 49 Window airbag......................................... 49
Air ow Setting................................................... 151
Alarm system see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
All-wheel drive see 4MATIC
Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 142
Android Auto see Smartphone integration
Animals Pets in the vehicle.................................... 78
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains see Snow chains
Anti-the protection Additional door lock................................. 82 Immobiliser.............................................. 99
Anti-the protection see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
Index 421
Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration
Assistance systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ 301 Displaying the service due date.............. 300 Function/notes...................................... 300 Regular maintenance work..................... 300 Special service requirements................. 300
ATA (anti-the alarm system) Deactivating the alarm........................... 100 Function.................................................. 99 Interior protection function..................... 101 Priming/deactivating interior protection........................................................ 101 Priming/deactivating tow-away protection................................................... 101 Tow-away protection function................. 100
ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 202 Setting................................................... 204 System limitations.................................. 202
Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST
Authorised workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop
Automatic car wash mode Activating............................................... 306
Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 52
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights................................ 140
Automatic front passenger airbag shuto PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 53
Automatic measures a er an accident............ 57
Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating.......................... 150
Automatic transmission Drive programs...................................... 167 DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... 167
Axle load Permissible............................................ 350
B
Bag hook..................................................... 130
BAS (Brake Assist System)........................... 198
Battery see High-voltage battery
Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical system)
see High-voltage battery
Battery (key) Replacing................................................. 81
Battery (vehicle) Notes..................................................... 322
Belt see Seat belt
Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 227 Function................................................ 224 System limitations.................................. 224
Blower see Climate control
422 Index
Bonnet Function (active bonnet)......................... 301 Opening/closing.................................... 302 Resetting (active bonnet)........................ 301
Boot lid see Tailgate
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake uid Notes..................................................... 353
Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 200
Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 198 Active Brake Assist................................. 216 Adaptive brake lights.............................. 202 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 198 Driving tips............................................ 161 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 200 HOLD function....................................... 200 Limited braking e ect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 161
New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 161 Post-collision brake.................................. 57 Running-in notes.................................... 161
Brakes see Recuperation
Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown Assistance overview................................. 18 Tow-starting........................................... 329 Towing away.......................................... 325 Transporting the vehicle......................... 327 Wheel change........................................ 342
Breakdown see Flat tyre
Buttons Steering wheel....................................... 248
C
Calls Mercedes me......................................... 278
Camera Information............................................ 196
Camera see 360° Camera see Dashcam see Reversing camera
Car key see Key
Car wash see Care
Car wash (care)............................................ 305
Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings.................... 271
Care 360° camera......................................... 309 Air-water duct........................................ 305 Automatic car wash............................... 305 Carpet................................................... 310 Decorative foil........................................ 308 Display................................................... 310 Exterior lighting...................................... 309 Head-up display..................................... 310 High-pressure cleaner............................ 307 Paint...................................................... 307
Index 423
Plastic trim............................................ 310 Real wood/trim elements...................... 310 Reversing camera.................................. 309 Roof lining............................................. 310 Seat belt................................................ 310 Seat cover............................................. 310 Sensors................................................. 309 Steering wheel....................................... 310 Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery................................................... 309 Washing by hand.................................... 307 Wheels/rims.......................................... 309 Windows................................................ 309 Wiper blades.......................................... 309
Carpet (Care)............................................... 310
Charging At time of departure............................... 188 Charge level display............................... 188 Charging cable control panel.................. 177 Con guring weekly pro le...................... 188 Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... 183 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 187 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 179
Notes - charging station (mode 3).......... 175 Notes - fast charging station (mode 4).... 176 Notes - mains socket (Mode 2)............... 174 Notes - wallbox (mode 3)........................ 175 Notes on charging the high-voltage battery................................................... 171 Notes on the high-voltage battery........... 323 On-board electrical system battery (12 V).................................................... 324 Setting the maximum possible charging current (mains socket)...................... 177 Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3)..................... 180 Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 184 Stowing the charging cable.................... 171 USB port................................................ 135
Charging cable Control panel......................................... 177 Stowing................................................. 171
Child safety lock Rear door................................................. 76 Rear side windows................................... 78
Child seat Approval categories................................. 63
Attaching (notes)...................................... 62 Basic instructions.................................... 57 Front passenger seat (notes).................... 74 Front passenger seat (without automatic airbag shuto )................................ 74 ISOFIX/i-Size ( tting)............................... 67 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 58 Recommendations for child restraint systems................................................... 61 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems..................................... 71 Seats suitable for iSize child restraint systems................................................... 66 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems..................................... 64 Securing on the co-driver seat.................. 75 Securing on the rear seat......................... 72 Top Tether................................................ 69
Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 58 Basic instructions.................................... 57
Chock Storage location..................................... 341
Chock see Chock
424 Index
Cleaning see Care
Cleaning uid see windscreen washer uid
Climate control Activating/deactivating.......................... 152 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)................................. 152 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system).............. 152 Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 153 Air-recirculation mode (with ne particle pre lter)........................................... 153 Automatic control.................................. 152 Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 152 Demisting the windscreen...................... 151 Demisting windows................................ 153 Front air vents........................................ 156 Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 155 Note...................................................... 151 Pre-entry climate control at departure time....................................................... 154 Pre-entry climate control using the key... 153
Rear air vents......................................... 156 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 152 Setting the air distribution...................... 151 Setting the air ow.................................. 151 Setting the temperature......................... 151 Switching the rear window heater on/o ................................................... 151 THERMATIC control panel...................... 151 THERMOTRONIC control panel............... 151 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 94
Clothes hook................................................ 131
Co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto
Cockpit Overview.................................................... 6
Co ee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST
Collision detection (parked vehicle) Information............................................ 195
Combination switch..................................... 140
Component-speci c information................... 350
Computer see On-board computer
Convenience closing...................................... 94
Convenience opening..................................... 94
Coolant (engine) Level check............................................ 304 Notes..................................................... 353
Cooling see Climate control
Copyright....................................................... 42
Crawler mode Function/notes...................................... 201
Cross tra c (warning) see Manoeuvring assistance
Cross Tra c Alert........................................ 244
Crosswind Assist Function/notes...................................... 199
Cruise control Activating............................................... 205 Buttons.................................................. 205 Calling up a speed................................. 205 Deactivating........................................... 205 Function................................................ 204
Index 425
Requirements:....................................... 205 Selecting............................................... 205 Setting a speed...................................... 205 Storing a speed...................................... 205 System limitations.................................. 204
D
Damping adjustment.................................... 229
Dashboard see Cockpit
Dashcam Notes..................................................... 273 Selecting a USB device.......................... 273 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 273
Data acquisition Vehicle..................................................... 38
Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 42
Data storage Data protection rights.............................. 42 Electronic control units............................ 38 Online services........................................ 41 Vehicle..................................................... 38
Deactivating the alarm (ATA)......................... 100
Dealership see Quali ed specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 27 Importer addresses.................................. 33 Jack......................................................... 34 Speci c absorption rate........................... 27 TIREFIT kit................................................ 34 Wireless vehicle components................... 27
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)........... 308
Destination entry Entering a POI or address....................... 268
Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection.................................. 35
Digital Owner's Manual.................................. 20
Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system
DIRECT SELECT lever Engaging drive position.......................... 171 Engaging neutral.................................... 170 Engaging park position........................... 170
Engaging park position automatically...... 170 Engaging reverse gear............................ 170 Function................................................ 169
Disconnect device High-voltage on-board electrical system........................................................ 157
Display (care)............................................... 310
Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... 253 Operating.............................................. 254
Display (on-board computer) Displays on the instrument display......... 249
Display in the windscreen see Head-up display
Display message Calling up (on-board computer).............. 358 Notes..................................................... 358
Display messages ç - - - km/h..................................... 388
È - - - km/h..................................... 388
h - - - km/h..................................... 387
_ 2nd seat row, le Not locked......... 379
426 Index
_ 2nd seat row, right Not locked...... 379 # 12 V battery See Owner's Manual......................................................... 374 ò Acoustic presence indicator inoperative............................................. 368 é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative..... 386 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!.................................................... 387 : Automatic driving lights inoperative...................................................... 365 Û Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible................ 373 Á Change key batteries.................... 362 è Charger cable connected.............. 370 J Check brake uid level.................. 385 h Check tyre(s)................................ 404 ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine o .............................................. 369 ! currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............................................ 398
÷ currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............................................ 399 ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h......... 397 6 Front le malfunction Consult workshop (example)............................... 359 & inoperative Charge HV battery...... 366 & inoperative High-voltage battery charging incomplete............................... 366 ! inoperative See Owner's Manual... 399 ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual... 400 T inoperative See Owner's Manual... 401 G Inoperative................................... 402 Á Key being initialised Please wait.... 363 Á Key not detected (red display message)............................................... 363 Á Key not detected (white display message)............................................... 363 : Le dipped beam (example).......... 364 6 Le windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example).................. 360
: Malfunction See Owner's Manual......................................................... 364 d Malfunction Visit workshop........... 375 Û Malfunction Visit workshop........... 373 d Malfunction.................................. 374 Û Malfunction.................................. 373 ð Maximum speed exceeded............ 390 ç O ................................................ 389 ë O ................................................ 386 ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual.................................................. 382 d Performance severely limited........ 367 & Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again a er engine start..... 366 & Pre-entry climate control (via key) inoperative HV-battery low.............. 367 h Rectify tyre pressure..................... 405 ! Release parking brake................... 385 Á Replace key.................................. 362
ô Reserve level Charge high-voltage battery............................................ 374 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop........................................ 359 Ù Steering malfunction Increased physical e ort See Owner's Manual....... 377 Ù Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual........... 377 Û Stop immediately Drive will be deactivated Charge high-volt. battery..... 372 d Stop Switch engine o .................. 375 ç suspended.................................... 388 : Switch o lights............................ 365 : Switch on headlamps.................... 365 á temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted....................................... 396 ¸ temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty....................................................... 395 + Top up coolant See Owner's Manual.................................................. 369
¥ Top up washer uid....................... 379 v Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual............................................ 368 ! Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake................................... 385 d Vehicle is operational Switch o ignition before exiting............................. 376 h Warning tyre defect....................... 405 h Wheel sensor(s) missing................ 404 AC charging inoperative Consult workshop...................................................... 371 Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 393 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 393 Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual............................................ 377 Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual......... 401 Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual.............................. 402
Index 427
Active Distance Assist available again..... 390 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 389 Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... 389 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 394 Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 394 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops........................................... 391 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 391 Active Steering Assist inoperative........... 391 Anti-the alarm system Malfunction....... 378 Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position........................................................ 380 Apply brake to select D or R................... 380 Apply brake to select R.......................... 380 Beginning emergency stop..................... 391
428 Index
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.............................. 392 Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 393 Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual.................................................. 403 Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual................. 371 Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method............................................ 371 Check brake pads See Owner's Manual......................................................... 386 Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 387 Cruise control inoperative...................... 387 Cruise control o ................................... 387 DC charging inoperative Consult workshop............................................... 371 Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual.................. 403
Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual..................................... 360 Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual..................................... 361 Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning.... 365 Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.............................. 376 Head-up display inoperative................... 377 High-voltage battery maintenance required urgently. No start in approx. XXX km (red display message)............... 375 High-voltage battery maintenance required urgently. No start in approx. XXX km (yellow display message)........... 375 High-voltage battery maintenance required urgently. Without engine restart, consult workshop....................... 376 Limiter inoperative................................. 388 Limiter passive....................................... 388
N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling.................................................... 381 Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual.............................. 370 Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary.............................................. 380 Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual................... 397 Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.............................. 364 Please wait. Battery has not yet reached operating temperature. Engine cannot start................................ 372 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual.................................................. 362 Reduce speed........................................ 407 Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual.............................. 371 Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 381
Index 429
Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P.............. 381 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 390 Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........................ 390 Speed Limit Assist inoperative................ 390 To shi out of P or N, depress brake and start engine..................................... 380 To switch o the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times...................................... 368 Tra c Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........................ 392 Tra c Sign Assist inoperative................. 392 Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 381 Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable......................................................... 403 Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. 404 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors........................................ 404
Tyre(s) overheated.................................. 406
Vehicle not currently being charged
Charging station fault............................. 370
Wiper malfunctioning............................. 379
Without changing gear, consult work-
shop...................................................... 381
Without starting engine again, consult
workshop............................................... 374
Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door Additional door lock................................. 82 Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 76 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 86 Opening (from inside)............................... 83 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 83
Door control panel......................................... 16
Drawbar see Tow-bar system
Drive Away Assist......................................... 243
Drive position Engaging................................................ 171
Drive program display.................................. 168
Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT
Drive system Manual switch-o ................................... 157 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 160
Driver's seat see Seat
Driving abroad Light adjustment (low beam).................. 139
Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 198 Active Brake Assist................................. 216 Adaptive brake lights.............................. 202 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 198 Cameras................................................ 196 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 200 ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 199 Overview................................................ 197 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 196 Responsibility......................................... 196
430 Index
STEER CONTROL................................... 200
Driving system Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment............................................ 229
Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Crawler mode see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Reversing camera see Speed Limit Assist see Tra c Sign Assist
Driving tips Acoustic presence indicator (sound generator).............................................. 157 Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)..................................................... 139 Electric mode......................................... 157 General driving tips................................ 161 Running-in notes.................................... 161
Driving tips see Recuperation
Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT Adaptive damping adjustment................ 229 Con guring drive program I.................... 169 Displaying vehicle data........................... 169 Drive program display............................ 168 Drive programs...................................... 167 Function................................................ 167 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)..... 168 Selecting the drive program................... 168
E
Easy entry feature Function/notes...................................... 115 Setting................................................... 116
Easy exit feature Function/notes...................................... 115 Setting................................................... 116
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Function/notes...................................... 200
ECO Assist Function................................................ 165
ECO display Function................................................ 163
Electric mode Notes..................................................... 157
Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 193 Applying/releasing manually.................. 195 Emergency braking................................ 195 Releasing automatically.......................... 194
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Index 431
Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity......................... 27
Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency Assistance overview................................. 18 Fire extinguisher.................................... 315 First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 314 Removing the warning triangle............... 313 Safety vest............................................. 313 Setting up the warning triangle............... 314
Emergency braking...................................... 195
Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency key Inserting/removing.................................. 81 Locking/unlocking the doors................... 86 Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 92
Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle................................ 160
Emergency shuto see High-voltage on-board electrical system
Emergency spare wheel Notes..................................................... 346
Emergency start (drive system).................... 329
Energy ow display Displaying.............................................. 265 Function/notes...................................... 265
Engine Engine number....................................... 350
Engine electronics Notes..................................................... 348
Engine number............................................. 350
ERA-GLONASS test mode Starting/ending..................................... 292
Error message see Display message
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP® Crosswind Assist.................................... 199
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating.......................... 200 Function/notes...................................... 198
EU type approval number............................. 350
Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 309
Exterior lighting see Lights
F
Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
Fire extinguisher.......................................... 315
First-aid kit (so sided)................................. 314
Flat towing see Tow-bar system
Flat tyre MOExtended tyres................................. 316 Notes..................................................... 315 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 317 Wheel change........................................ 342
Floor mats................................................... 137
432 Index
Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 196
Free so ware................................................. 42
Frequencies Mobile phone......................................... 349 Two-way radio........................................ 349
Front airbag (driver, front passenger).............. 49
Front passenger seat see Seat
Fuel consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. 169
Function seat see Door control panel
Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 329 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 329 Fuse box in the engine compartment...... 330 Fuse box in the front passenger footwell........................................................ 331 Fuse box in the load compartment......... 332 Notes..................................................... 329
G
Garage door opener Clearing the memory.............................. 193
Garage door openers Opening/closing the door...................... 193 Programming buttons............................. 191 Resolving problems................................ 192 Synchronising the rolling code................ 192
Genuine parts................................................ 22
Gross mass.................................................. 350
H
Handbrake see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual)................ 333
HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... 90
Hazard warning lights................................... 141
Head restraint Front (adjusting mechanically)................ 110 Rear (adjusting)...................................... 111 Rear (removing/ tting)........................... 112
Head-up display Adjusting brightness (on-board computer).................................................... 250 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 250 Care...................................................... 310 Function................................................ 250 Menu (on-board computer)..................... 250 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Setting the position (on-board computer).................................................... 250 Switching on/o .................................... 251
Headlamp ashing........................................ 140
Headlamps see Automatic driving lights
Heating see Climate control
Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
High beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 140
High-pressure cleaner (care)........................ 307
High-voltage battery Charge level display............................... 188
Index 433
Charging at time of departure................ 188 Charging cable control panel.................. 177 Charging duration.................................. 355 Con guring weekly pro le...................... 188 Connection types................................... 355 Disconnect device................................. 157 Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... 183 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 187 Energy ow display................................. 265 Function/notes...................................... 323 General notes on charging..................... 171 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 179 Notes on charging (charging station, mode 3)................................................. 175 Notes on charging (fast charging station, mode 2)......................................... 176 Notes on charging (mains socket, mode 2)................................................. 174 Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 175 Range.................................................... 355 Setting the maximum possible charging current (mains socket)...................... 177 Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3)..................... 180
Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 184 Stowing the charging cable.................... 171 Type....................................................... 355 Voltage types......................................... 355
High-voltage on-board electrical system Charging cable control panel.................. 177 Disconnect device................................. 157 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 179 Manual disconnection............................ 157
Hill Start Assist............................................ 202
HOLD function Function/notes...................................... 200 Switching on/o .................................... 201
Home screen (media display) Overview................................................ 253
I
i-Size child seat securing system Fitting...................................................... 67 Seats suitable for attaching...................... 66
Identi cation plate Engine................................................... 350 Vehicle.................................................. 350
Ignition key see Key
Immediate pre-entry climate control............. 155
Immobiliser.................................................... 99
Implied warranty Vehicle..................................................... 38
Importer addresses Wireless components............................... 33
In-Car O ce Features................................................ 284
Indicator lamp see Warning/indicator lamp
Individual drive program Con guring............................................ 169 Selecting............................................... 168
Inspection see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster Function/notes.............................. 246, 247
Instrument display Function/notes...................................... 247 Instrument cluster.................................... 10 Overview of displays............................... 249
434 Index
Warning/indicator lamps........................ 407
Instrument display and on-board computer
Function/notes...................................... 246
Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 142 Ambient lighting..................................... 142 Reading lamp......................................... 142 Switch-o delay time.............................. 143
Interior protection Function................................................ 101 Priming/deactivating............................. 101
Internet radio see TuneIn
iPhone® see Smartphone integration
ISOFIX child seat anchor Seats suitable for attaching...................... 64
ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting...................................................... 67
J
Jack Declaration of conformity......................... 34 Storage location..................................... 341
Jump-start connection.................................. 324
K
Key Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 80 Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control.......................................... 154 Battery..................................................... 81 Deactivating a function............................ 80 Emergency key......................................... 81 Energy consumption................................ 80 Function overview.................................... 79 Key ring attachment................................. 81 Problem................................................... 82 Unlocking setting..................................... 80
KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function............................ 80 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 84 Problem................................................... 85 Unlocking setting..................................... 80
Knee airbag.................................................... 49
L
Lamp see Interior lighting
Lamp (instrument display) see Warning/indicator lamp
Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language Notes..................................................... 264 Setting................................................... 264
Light adjustment Low beam (driving abroad)..................... 139
Light switch Overview................................................ 139
Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights
Lights Automatic driving lights.......................... 140
Index 435
Combination switch............................... 140 Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)..................................................... 139 Hazard warning lights............................. 141 Headlamp ashing................................. 140 High beam............................................. 140 Light switch........................................... 139 Low beam.............................................. 139 Parking lights......................................... 139 Rear fog light......................................... 139 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 139 Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time.............................................. 141 Standing lights....................................... 139 Switching the surround lighting on/o ... 142 Turn signal indicator............................... 140
Limiter Activating............................................... 205 Buttons.................................................. 205 Calling up a speed................................. 205 Deactivating........................................... 205 Function................................................ 205 Passive mode......................................... 205 Permanent setting.................................. 207 Requirements........................................ 205
Selecting............................................... 205 Setting a speed...................................... 205 Storing a speed.............................. 205, 209 Switching o /deactivating..................... 209 Switching on/activating......................... 209 System limits......................................... 205
Limiting speed see Limiter
Limiting the opening angle (tailgate)............... 91
LINGUATRONIC Function................................................ 256 Starting................................................. 256
Live Tra c Information Switching the tra c information display on................................................... 271
Load compartment cover Extending/retracting.............................. 127 Notes..................................................... 127 Removing/ tting.................................... 128
Loading Bag hook............................................... 130 Clothes hook......................................... 131 Notes..................................................... 118 Roof luggage rack.................................. 131
Tie-down eyes........................................ 130
Loading guidelines....................................... 118
Loads Fixing..................................................... 118
Locking/unlocking Additional door lock................................. 82 Emergency key......................................... 86 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 84 Opening the tailgate................................. 87 Switching the automatic locking feature on/o .............................................. 85 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 83
Low beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 139 Light adjustment (driving abroad)........... 139
Luggage Securing................................................ 118
Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way)............................... 106
436 Index
M
Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 44
Manoeuvring aid see Manoeuvring assistance
Manoeuvring assistance Cross Tra c Alert.................................. 244 Drive Away Assist................................... 243
Manoeuvring assistant Activating/deactivating.......................... 244
Map Displaying online map contents.............. 271 Displaying weather information.............. 271 Moving................................................... 271 Selecting the map orientation................ 271 Setting the map scale............................ 271 Switching motorway information on/o ................................................... 271
Massage programmes Resetting the settings............................ 112 Selecting the front seats........................ 112
Maximum design speed see Limiter
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight... 350
MBUX Interior Assistant Overview................................................ 257 Switching the reading light on/o (contactless).......................................... 258 Switching the search light on/o (contactless).......................................... 258
MBUX multimedia system Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 195 Con guring drive program I.................... 169 Home screen......................................... 253 Notes..................................................... 252 Operating the touchscreen..................... 254 Overview................................................ 252 Restoring (factory settings).................... 265 Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 213 Setting the air distribution...................... 153
MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant
Media Overview of the functions and symbols... 294
Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equipment...................................................... 295
Medical aids................................................... 37
Memory function Function................................................ 116 Head-up display -- Calling up stored settings.................................................. 117 Head-up display -- Storing settings......... 117 Operating.............................................. 117 Outside mirrors -- Calling up stored settings.................................................. 117 Outside mirrors -- Storing settings.......... 117 Seat -- Calling up stored settings............ 117 Seat -- Storing settings........................... 117
Menu (on-board computer) Head-up display..................................... 250 Overview................................................ 248
Mercedes me app Information............................................ 284 Notes....................................................... 24 on-demand feature................................... 24
Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ 280
Index 437
Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.................................................... 279 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre a er automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 280 Consenting to data transfer.................... 281 Information............................................ 279 Making a call via the overhead control panel..................................................... 278 Transferred data..................................... 281
Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management... 283 Information............................................ 282 Transferred data..................................... 284
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call...................... 289 Information............................................ 287 Information about data transfer...... 290, 292 Manual emergency call.......................... 290 Overview................................................ 289 Self-diagnosis........................................ 292 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode..................................................... 292
Mercedes-Benz service centre see Quali ed specialist workshop
Message (instrument display) see Display message
Message memory......................................... 358
Mirrors see Outside mirrors
Mobile phone Frequencies........................................... 349 Notes on wireless charging.................... 135 Transmission output (maximum)............. 349
Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Model type see Vehicle identi cation plate
MOExtended tyres........................................ 316
Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons............................... 248
Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel
Multimedia system see MBUX multimedia system
N
Navigation Activating............................................... 266 Notes..................................................... 266 Overview................................................ 267 Showing/hiding the menu...................... 266
Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route
Navigation with Electric Intelligence see Route
Neutral Engaging................................................ 170
Noise Wheels and tyres................................... 333 Wheels/tyres......................................... 333
O
Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic measures a er an accident
438 Index
see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt
On-board computer Displaying the service due date.............. 300 Head-up display menu............................ 250 Instrument display................................. 249 Menu overview....................................... 248 Operating.............................................. 248
On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection
On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Charging................................................ 324 Replacing............................................... 324 Starting assistance................................ 324
On-board electronics Engine electronics................................. 348 Notes..................................................... 348
Two-way radios...................................... 348
on-demand feature Activating................................................. 24 Notes....................................................... 24
Online services Data storage............................................ 41
Online services see In-Car O ce
Open-source so ware.................................... 42
Opening the tailgate using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 90
Operating uids Brake uid............................................. 353 Coolant (engine).................................... 353 Notes..................................................... 352 windscreen washer uid......................... 354
Operating safety Declaration of conformity (electromagnetic compatibility)............................ 27 Declaration of conformity (jack)............... 34 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit)...... 34 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)................................ 27 Information.............................................. 25
Operating system see On-board computer
Outside mirrors Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 149 Automatic mirror folding function........... 150 Folding in/out........................................ 148 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Parking position..................................... 149 Setting................................................... 148
Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 14
Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 24
Owner's Manual (digital)................................. 20
P
Paint (cleaning instructions)......................... 307
Paint code................................................... 350
Panorama sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof
Park position Engaging................................................ 170 Selecting automatically.......................... 170
Index 439
Parking see Electric parking brake
Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating............................................... 238 Adjusting warning tones......................... 239 Deactivating........................................... 238 Function................................................ 235 Side impact protection........................... 237 System limitations.................................. 235
Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking lights............................................... 139
Parking option Selecting............................................... 271
Parking position Outside mirrors...................................... 149 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........... 150
Parking service Selecting parking options....................... 271
Partitioning net Attaching............................................... 128
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto
Pedestrian protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Permissible axle load.................................... 350
Permissible towing methods......................... 324
Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 78
Plastic trim (Care)........................................ 310
Post-collision brake........................................ 57
Power supply Switching on (start/stop button)............ 159
Pre-entry climate control (immediate)........... 155
Pre-entry climate control at departure time
Function................................................ 154 Setting................................................... 155
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
Activating/deactivating.......................... 155
Pre-entry climate control using the key Function................................................ 153 Setting................................................... 154
Pre-entry climate control via the key Activating/deactivating.......................... 154
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Function.................................................. 56 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 56 Reversing measures................................. 56
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Function.................................................. 56 Reversing measures................................. 56
Preventative occupant protection system see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Pro le Creating a new pro le............................ 260
440 Index
Notes..................................................... 259 Selecting pro le options......................... 260 Programme see DYNAMIC SELECT Protection of the environment Notes....................................................... 22 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 22
Q
QR code Rescue card............................................. 38
Quali ed specialist workshop......................... 36
R
Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage................................................. 196
Radio Overview of the functions and symbols... 296
Rain closing function Side windows........................................... 93
Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof......................................... 98
REACH regulation........................................... 37
Reading lamp see Interior lighting
Reading light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 258
Real wood (Care).......................................... 310
Rear door (child safety lock)........................... 76
Rear fog light Switching on/o .................................... 140
Rear seat see Seat see Third row of seats
Rear seat belt Status display.......................................... 48
Rear seat belt status display........................... 48
Rear window Replacing wiper blade............................ 147
Rear window heater...................................... 151
Rear window wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 144
Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 149
Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors
Recuperation Function................................................ 164 Setting................................................... 165
Recycling see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Registration Vehicle..................................................... 37
Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia............................................... 350 Small components................................. 350
Rescue card................................................... 38
Reset function (MBUX multimedia system).... 265
Restoring (factory settings) see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)
Restraint system Basic instructions for children.................. 57 Function in an accident............................ 44 Functionality............................................ 44 Limited protection.................................... 43 Malfunction............................................. 44 Protection................................................ 43
Index 441
Self-test................................................... 44 Warning lamp........................................... 44
Reverse gear Engaging................................................ 170
Reversing camera Care...................................................... 309 Function................................................ 230 Opening the camera cover (360° Camera)................................................ 235 Switching automatic operation on/o (360° Camera)...................................... 235
Rims (care).................................................. 309
Roll away protection see HOLD function
Roller sunblind Sliding sunroof......................................... 95
Roof lining (care).......................................... 310
Roof load..................................................... 355
Roof load display Information............................................ 168
Roof luggage rack Loading.................................................. 131 Securing................................................ 131
Route Calculating............................................. 269 Selecting options................................... 269 Switching on Electric Intelligence........... 269
Route guidance with augmented reality Activating............................................... 269 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 269
Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 212 Setting................................................... 213
Run- at characteristics MOExtended tyres................................. 316
Running-in notes.......................................... 161
S
Safety systems see Driving safety system
Safety vest................................................... 313
Search light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 258
Seat 4-way lumbar support............................ 106
adjusting (electrically)............................ 106 Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 105 Adjusting the backrest (rear).................. 108 Adjusting the rear seat (mechanically).... 107 Adjusting the seat backrest angle (rear)..................................................... 126 Adjustment (without Seat Comfort Package)................................................ 103 Con guring settings............................... 112 Correct driver's seat position................. 102 Folding back the backrest (rear)............. 122 Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats........................................... 125 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards to get in (third row of seats)................... 108 Folding the backrest forwards (rear)....... 121 Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards................................... 123 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Resetting the settings............................ 112 Setting options......................................... 16
Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 48 Care...................................................... 310
442 Index
Fastening................................................. 47 Protection................................................ 45 Rear seat belt status display..................... 48 Reduced protection.................................. 46 Releasing................................................. 48 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 48 Warning lamp........................................... 48
Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 48 Function.................................................. 48
Seat belt tensioners Activation................................................ 44
Seat belt warning see Seat belt
Seat cover (Care)......................................... 310
Seat heating Activating/deactivating.......................... 113
Seat ventilation Switching on/o .................................... 113
Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test Automatic front passenger airbag shut o ............................................................ 53
Sensors (care)............................................. 309
Service see ASSYST PLUS
Service centre see Quali ed specialist workshop
Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS
Setting a speed see Cruise control
Setting the map scale see Map
Side airbag..................................................... 49
Side impact protection................................. 237
Side windows Automatic function................................... 93 Child safety lock in the rear...................... 78 Closing using the key............................... 94 Convenience closing................................ 94 Convenience opening............................... 94 Opening with the key................................ 94
Opening/closing...................................... 92 Problem................................................... 95 Rain closing function................................ 93
Sliding sunroof Automatic functions................................. 98 Closing.................................................... 95 Closing using the key............................... 94 Opening................................................... 95 Opening with the key................................ 94 Problem................................................... 99 Rain-closing feature................................. 98
Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Smartphone integration Overview................................................ 286
Snow chains................................................ 333
Socket (12 V) Boot/luggage compartment................... 132 Front centre console.............................. 132
Socket (115 V) Rear....................................................... 133
Socket (230 V) Rear....................................................... 134
Index 443
So ware update System updates..................................... 261
Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 56
Sound generator Acoustic presence indicator................... 157
Sound menu Functions overview................................ 299
Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Specialist workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop
Speci c absorption rate................................. 27
Speed Limit Assist Function/notes...................................... 221 Setting................................................... 222 System limitations.................................. 221
Speed limit for winter tyres Setting................................................... 207
Standing lights............................................. 139
Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................. 190 Starting the vehicle................................ 160
Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 159
Starting see Vehicle
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting-o aid see Hill Start Assist
STEER CONTROL Function/notes...................................... 200
Steering wheel Adjusting (manually)............................... 114 Buttons.................................................. 248 Care...................................................... 310 Steering wheel heater............................ 115
Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating.......................... 115
Stowage areas see Loading see Stowage space
Stowage compartments see Loading see Stowage space
Stowage space Armrest................................................. 120 Centre console...................................... 120 Door...................................................... 120 Glove compartment............................... 120
Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. 269
Suggestions Con guring............................................ 260
Surround lighting Switching on/o .................................... 142
Surround View see 360° Camera
Suspension Adaptive damping adjustment................ 229 Damping characteristics......................... 229
SVHC (substances of very high concern)........ 37
Switch-o delay time Exterior.................................................. 141 Interior................................................... 143
Synchronisation function Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 153
444 Index
System settings Overview of the system settings menu.... 261 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)....................................................... 265
System settings see Language
T
Tailgate Closing.................................................... 88 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 90 Limiting the opening angle....................... 91 Opening................................................... 87 Unlocking (emergency key)...................... 92
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Protection of the environment.................. 22
Technical data Component-speci c information............ 350 Information............................................ 348 Regulatory radio identi cation (Indonesia).................................................... 350 Regulatory radio identi cation of small components.................................. 350
Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 278 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... 278 Functions in the telephone menu............ 278 Notes..................................................... 274 Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... 135 Operating modes................................... 277 Telephone menu overview...................... 277 Wireless charging (mobile phone)........... 136
Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® telephony............................. 277
Temperature................................................ 151
Themes Fastening............................................... 260
Third row of seats Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats........................................... 125 Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards................................... 123 Getting in/out........................................ 108 Height limit............................................ 103
Through-loading feature see Seat see Third row of seats
Tie-down eyes.............................................. 130
TIREFIT kit Declaration of conformity......................... 34 Storage location..................................... 316 Using..................................................... 317
To switch on the ignition see Vehicle
Tool see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether...................................................... 69
Touch Control On-board computer................................ 248 Operating.............................................. 254
Touchpad Operating.............................................. 254
Touchscreen Operating.............................................. 254
Tow-away protection Function................................................ 100 Priming/deactivating............................. 101
Index 445
Tow-bar system............................................ 244
Tow-starting................................................. 329
Towing away................................................. 325
Towing eye Fitting.................................................... 328 Storage location..................................... 328
Towing methods........................................... 324
Tra c information Switching on the display......................... 271
Tra c Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 222 Setting................................................... 224 System limits......................................... 222
Transmission Crawler mode........................................ 201 DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 169 Drive program display............................ 168 Engaging drive position.......................... 171 Engaging neutral.................................... 170 Engaging park position........................... 170 Engaging reverse gear............................ 170 Transmission position display................. 169 Transmission positions........................... 169
Transmission position display....................... 169
Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 327
Trim element (Care)...................................... 310
TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 298
Turn signal indicator Activating/deactivating.......................... 140
Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 349 Notes on installation.............................. 348 Transmission output (maximum)............. 349
Type approval number (EU)........................... 350
Tyre in ation compressor see TIREFIT kit
Tyre pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system).................................................. 336 Notes..................................................... 334 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 337 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 317
Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 336 Tyre pressure table................................. 335
Tyre pressure monitoring system Checking the tyre pressures................... 336 Checking the tyre temperature............... 336 Function................................................ 336 Restarting.............................................. 337
Tyre pressure table....................................... 335
Tyre temperature Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system).................................................. 336 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 336
Tyre tread.................................................... 333
Tyre-change tool kit Overview................................................ 341
Tyres Checking............................................... 333 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)......................... 336 Fitting.................................................... 344 Flat tyre................................................. 315 Interchanging......................................... 340
446 Index
MOExtended tyres................................. 316 Noise..................................................... 333 Notes on tting...................................... 337 Removing............................................... 344 Replacing....................................... 337, 342 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 337 Selection............................................... 337 Snow chains.......................................... 333 Storing................................................... 341 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 317 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 334 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 336 Tyre pressure table................................. 335 Unusual handling characteristics............ 333
U
Unlocking see Locking/unlocking
Updates Important system updates...................... 261
USB port Front stowage compartment.................. 120 Rear....................................................... 135
V
Vehicle Additional door lock................................. 82 Correct use.............................................. 37 Data acquisition....................................... 38 Data storage............................................ 38 Diagnostics connection............................ 35 Equipment............................................... 24 Implied warranty...................................... 38 Locking (automatically)............................ 85 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 86 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 83 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 84 Lowering................................................ 345 Medical aids............................................ 37 QR code rescue card............................... 38 Quali ed specialist workshop................... 36 Raising................................................... 342 REACH regulation.................................... 37 Registration............................................. 37 Setting collision detection (parked vehicle).................................................. 195 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 160 Starting (start/stop button)................... 160 SVHC (substances of very high concern).. 37
Switching o (start/stop button)............ 190 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 159 Towing................................................... 244 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 94
Vehicle battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)
Vehicle camera Information............................................ 196
Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 169 Roof load............................................... 355 Vehicle height........................................ 355 Vehicle length........................................ 355 Vehicle width......................................... 355 Wheelbase............................................. 355
Vehicle dimensions...................................... 355
Vehicle identi cation number see VIN
Vehicle identi cation plate EU type approval number....................... 350 Maximum gross vehicle weight............... 350 Paint code............................................. 350 Permissible axle load.............................. 350 VIN........................................................ 350
Index 447
Vehicle key see Key
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 196
Vehicle socket Care...................................................... 309 Indicator lamps...................................... 179
Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 316 Towing eye............................................. 328
Ventilating Convenience opening............................... 94
Ventilation see Climate control
Vents see Air vents
VIN Identi cation plate................................. 350 Seat....................................................... 350 Windscreen............................................ 350
Vision Demisting windows................................ 153
W
Warning lamp see Warning/indicator lamp
Warning system see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
Warning triangle Removing............................................... 313 Setting up.............................................. 314
Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp......................... 415 Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp.. 414 J Brake system warning lamp (red)... 413 J Brake system warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... 412 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red).............................................. 412 # Electrical fault warning lamp......... 411 å ESP® OFF warning lamp................ 416
÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........... 415 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up......... 416 Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 411 _ Reduced warning lamp power....... 410 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 409 ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 409 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 410 Ú System error warning lamp........... 410 ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp................................. 412 h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes....................... 417 h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up.................... 418 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 414 Overview................................................ 407 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 53
Warranty........................................................ 38
448 Index
Washing by hand (care)................................ 307
Water tank see Air-water duct
Weather information..................................... 271
Web browsers Overview................................................ 285
Wheel change Fitting a new wheel................................ 344 Lowering the vehicle.............................. 345 Preparation............................................ 342 Raising the vehicle................................. 342 Removing a wheel.................................. 344
Wheel change see Emergency spare wheel
Wheel rotation............................................. 340
Wheels Care...................................................... 309 Checking............................................... 333 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)......................... 336 Fitting.................................................... 344 Flat tyre................................................. 315 Interchanging......................................... 340 MOExtended tyres................................. 316
Noise..................................................... 333 Notes on tting...................................... 337 Removing............................................... 344 Replacing....................................... 337, 342 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 337 Selection............................................... 337 Snow chains.......................................... 333 Storing................................................... 341 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 317 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 334 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 336 Tyre pressure table................................. 335 Unusual handling characteristics............ 333
Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 262
Widescreen cockpit instrument display Instrument cluster.................................... 12
Window airbag............................................... 49
Window li er see Side windows
Windows Care...................................................... 309
Windows see Side windows
Windscreen Demisting.............................................. 151 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 145
Windscreen see Windscreen
windscreen washer uid Notes..................................................... 354
Windscreen washer system Topping up............................................. 304
Windscreen wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 144 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 145
Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 333
Winter tyres Setting the permanent speed limit.......... 207
Wiper blades Care...................................................... 309 Replacing (windscreen).......................... 145
Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 135
Mobile phone......................................... 136
Wireless components Importer addresses.................................. 33
Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity......................... 27 Speci c absorption rate........................... 27
Workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop
Index 449